JP2019092567A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To effectively execute attention calling regarding excessive devotion.SOLUTION: In a game machine that employs a transmissive display as a performance display device, a predetermined attention calling image is displayed in a display area other than a transmissive area and attention calling regarding excessive devotion is executed. As described above, since a predetermined attention calling image is displayed in the display area other than the transmissive area, it is possible to suppress giving an unpleasant feeling due to attention calling regarding excessive devotion which is disturbed. Furthermore, it is easy to shift the line of sight of a player recognizing a reel with respect to the reel to a predetermined attention calling image, and the attention to a predetermined attention calling image can also be enhanced by changing the line of sight, thereby effectively executing attention calling regarding excessive devotion.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 23

Description

  The present invention relates to a game machine.

  Conventionally, in pachinko gaming machines and slot machines (so-called roll-to-roll gaming machines) which are a type of gaming machines, cards (for example, storage media such as prepaid cards) from card units (so-called CR units) There are things that remind you that you will not forget to take out. For example, in the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, two areas near the firing handle are used to warn that the user does not forget to take out the card.

JP 2013-090762 A (in particular, paragraph [0246], FIG. 32, etc.)

Nowadays, it is desirable to devise not only reminders about not forgetting to take out a card, but also reminders about depression.
An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively executing a warning regarding depression.

  A gaming machine for solving the above problems comprises a plurality of reels and a transmissive display, the transmissive display being disposed on the front side of the plurality of reels, and the display area of the transmissive display being disposed on the rear side And a reel visual recognition area capable of visualizing the reels, and a predetermined visual alert image is displayed in a display area different from the reel visual recognition area in the display area of the transmissive display, and a warning concerning the immersion is executed. The point is to be

In the above-mentioned gaming machine, in front view, the width of the predetermined alerting image may be longer than the width of one reel.
The above-mentioned gaming machine includes a specific movable body and operation control means for controlling the operation of the specific movable body, and a display area in which the predetermined alerting image is displayed is different from the reel visual recognition area The display area may be an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the specific movable body.

  For the above-mentioned gaming machine, the special visual recognition control means for performing special visual recognition control to make it difficult to visually recognize the reel is provided when the predetermined visual awakening image is displayed and the attention concerning the immersion is executed, and the special visual recognition control means In the special visual recognition control, the backlight installed behind the reel may be turned off.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to effectively carry out a warning regarding depression.

The figure which shows the machine front side of a slot machine. FIG. The figure which shows an information panel. The figure which shows the pushing order of a stop button. Diagram showing the part and the prize. The figure which shows game state. FIG. (A) is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the frequency | count of a ceiling according to an internal mode, (b) is a figure which shows the determination ratio of the internal mode of the transfer destination according to an internal mode. The figure which shows the electric constitution of a slot machine. The figure which shows the winning probability of the various bonus part according to the setting value. The flowchart which shows game progress main processing. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of the presentation display apparatus when navigation presentation is performed. (A) is a diagram showing an example of the display content of the effect display device when the settlement effect is executed, (b) is an example of the display content of the effect display device when the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed Figure showing. The figure which shows the execution start condition of waiting production. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a presentation display apparatus when standby presentation is performed. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a presentation display apparatus when standby presentation is performed. (A) and (b) shows an example of the display content of the effect display device when the menu is displayed, and (c) shows an example of the display content of the effect display device when it becomes the display content regarding volume adjustment The figure which shows, (d) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a presentation display apparatus when it becomes the display content regarding presentation explanation. The flowchart which shows special stagnation processing. (A) is a figure which shows the determination probability of the production content of the appearance production according to the setting value, (b) is a figure which shows the determination probability of the production content of the starry sky production according to the internal mode. (A)-(d) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of an effect display apparatus when ending effect is performed after the game of the last time in a bonus game state. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a presentation display apparatus when ending production | presentation is performed after the last game in an advantageous production state. The figure which shows an example of the game arcade which has installed the slot machine and the pachinko game machine. (A) is a figure showing an example of the display contents of the effect display device when the alert about the depression is executed after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state, (b) is the final number in the advantageous effect state The figure which shows an example of the display content of an effect display apparatus when the alert about an inset is performed after a fluctuation game, (c) is an effect display when the alert about an inset is performed during execution of a standby effect. The figure which shows an example of the display content. (A)-(c) is a figure explaining after completion | finish of a 1st bonus gaming state, after completion | finish of a single bonus gaming state, and after completion | finish of a 1st advantageous rendering state. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the flow of an effect when the settlement process is performed when the settlement button is operated. (A) shows an example of the flow of effects when the settlement button is operated after winning a bell combination, and (b) shows an example of the flow of effects when the settlement button is operated after the winning of the winning combination. . The flowchart which shows the special stagnation processing in a 2nd embodiment. (A) and (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of an effect display apparatus when opening production is performed before the first game in the bonus game state of 2nd Embodiment, (c) and (d) The figure which shows an example of the display content of a presentation display apparatus when opening presentation is performed before the first game in the advantageous presentation state of 2nd Embodiment. In (a) to (c), in the second embodiment, when the first bonus combination is won and the first bonus gaming state is established, the single bonus combination is won and the single bonus gaming state is established. The figure explaining the case and the case where a promotion replay role is won and controlled to the 1st advantageous effect state. The flowchart which shows the special stagnation processing in a 3rd embodiment. (A) and (b) shows an example of the display content of the effect display device when the interval effect is executed in the bonus game state in the third embodiment, and (c) and (d) show the third The figure which shows an example of the display content of a presentation display apparatus when an interval presentation is performed, when it is an advantage presentation state in embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure explaining the time of being in a 1st bonus game state, and the time of being in a 1st advantageous rendering state in a 3rd embodiment. (A) And (b) is a figure which shows an example of the display content of a presentation display apparatus when the alert regarding a dent is performed in 4th Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a slot machine which is a type of gaming machine will be described. In the present specification, each direction of upper, lower, left, right, front (front), and rear (back) refers to each direction as viewed from a player playing a game in a slot machine.

FIG. 1 shows a slot machine 10 as a gaming machine, and a sand unit SU juxtaposed to the slot machine 10 in an island facility of the game arcade.
The sand unit SU is provided with an insertion / return port SUa for inserting a prepaid card as a storage medium. The sand unit SU is provided with a return button SUb that is operated when the inserted prepaid card is returned. When the return button SUb is operated, the prepaid card is returned from the input / return port SUa. The prepaid card stores, for example, the remaining amount of the card as a value usable for gaming, and the number of medals acquired as the acquired value acquired. In addition, the sand unit SU is provided with a lending button SUc that is operated when the medal as a game medium is lent. The sand unit SU is provided with a medal lending port SUd from which medals to be lent out are discharged. When the value stored in the prepaid card is present, when the lending button SUc is operated, the medal is discharged from the medal lending port SUd. In the present embodiment, the medal lent out by the sand unit SU corresponds to a gaming machine medium based on the value stored in the storage medium. The sand unit SU may be provided with a bill insertion slot for inserting a bill, and the remaining amount of prepaid card increases according to the bill inserted from the bill insertion slot.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with a box-shaped main cabinet 11. The main body cabinet 11 has an opening (not shown) on the front surface. The slot machine 10 is provided with an open / close door 12 that covers the opening of the main body cabinet 11. The open / close door 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to the main body cabinet 11.

A reel unit 13 is disposed inside the main body cabinet 11. The reel unit 13 has a first reel 13a (left reel), a second reel 13b (middle reel), and a third reel 13c (right reel). The reels 13a to 13c are juxtaposed, the second reel 13b is disposed on the right side of the first reel 13a, and the third reel 13c is disposed on the right side of the second reel 13b. Further, the reel unit 13 has an actuator such as a stepping motor. The respective reels 13a to 13c are configured to be rotatable (pivotable) in the circumferential direction (longitudinal direction) independently of each other by operating the actuators. Further, the respective reels 13a to 13c are configured to be able to stop independently of each other by stopping the operation of the actuator. The reel unit 13 also has reel sensors SE1 to SE3 (shown in FIG. 9) that detect the rotational position of each of the reels 13a to 13c. Specifically, the reel unit 13 detects the rotational position of the first reel 13a, the second reel sensor SE2 detects the rotational position of the second reel 13b, and the rotational position of the third reel 13c. And a third reel sensor SE3 that detects the

  On each of the reels 13a to 13c, a translucent film on which a plurality of symbols (identification information) are printed along the longitudinal direction is wound outward. Thereby, a plurality of symbols are arranged (arranged) along the outer peripheral surface on each of the reels 13a to 13c. In the present embodiment, 21 symbols are arranged on each of the reels 13a to 13c. For a plurality of symbols, for example, a replay symbol imitating characters of REPLAY, a bell symbol imitating a bell, a watermelon symbol imitating a watermelon, a cherry symbol imitating a cherry, a bar symbol imitating a character of BAR, Arabic numerals There are seven symbols etc. which imitated "7" of.

  Further, in the open / close door 12, the effect display device 14 is disposed on the front side of the reel unit 13 having the reels 13a to 13c. A transmission type display (transmission type liquid crystal display) is used as the effect display device 14 of the present embodiment. Thus, in the present embodiment, the transmissive display is disposed in front of the plurality of reels. As the effect display device 14, for example, a dot matrix type display device or an organic EL type display device may be used. The effect display device 14 has a transmission area 14 a as a transmission part that allows a symbol of a part of each of the rotating reels 13 a to 13 c to be seen (visible). That is, the slot machine 10 includes the transmissive region 14a (transmissive portion). In the effect display device 14, a region surrounding the transmissive region 14a is a non-transmissive region in which a pattern of a part of each of the reels 13a to 13c can not be seen (not visible). In addition, when showing as "permeate" in this specification, it is the state which can see through visually the symbol of each reel 13a-13c arrange | positioned on the back side of the effect display apparatus 14 via the effect display apparatus 14. It shall be pointed out that

  In each of the reels 13a to 13c, the stop position of the symbol for stopping the symbol is set so that the player can visually recognize through the transparent area 14a. Stop positions of a plurality of symbols are set on each of the reels 13a to 13c. In the slot machine 10, the upper stage stop position, the middle stage stop position, and the lower stage stop position are set for each of the reels 13a to 13c. The transmission area 14a is formed in such a size as to allow three symbols that are continuous in the circumferential direction to be seen through in each of the reels 13a to 13c. That is, the transmissive area 14a is configured such that three symbols can be seen through each of the reels 13a to 13c. In the present embodiment, as the respective reels 13a to 13c rotate, the symbols are variably displayed so as to loop in the circumferential direction from the upper side to the lower side in the transparent area 14a, and the variation game (game) is performed. Incidentally, in the reels 13a to 13c of the present embodiment, the types of symbols arranged on the respective reels 13a to 13c and the arrangement order of the symbols are different. In each of the reels 13a to 13c, it is preferable that at least one of the types of symbols and the arrangement order of the symbols on some reels is different from the type of symbols and the arrangement of symbols on other reels. However, the type of symbols on one reel and the arrangement order of symbols may be the same as the type of symbols on another reel and the arrangement order of symbols.

  In the slot machine 10, a combination of effective stop positions at which a stopped symbol combination can be determined to be a prize by a combination of the stop positions selected one by one from the three stop positions set for each of the reels 13a to 13c. Is set. In the following description, a line connecting a plurality of stop positions constituting a combination of effective stop positions is simply referred to as an effective line YL. In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the middle line stop positions of the reels 13a to 13c constitute an effective line YL (combination of effective stop positions). An effective line is also referred to as a pay line.

  In the following description, when the symbol combination stopped on the effective line YL is a symbol combination for which an award has been determined, “winning” is made. In the slot machine 10, when the symbol combination defining an award wins, an award determined for the symbol combination is awarded. In the present specification, the “symbol combination derived in the variation game” corresponds to the symbol combination stopped on the effective line YL in the variation game. A combination other than the combination of effective stop positions is a combination of so-called invalid stop positions where it is not possible to determine that the displayed symbol combination is a prize.

  The slot machine 10 includes a plurality of backlights BL. Specifically, the slot machine 10 is provided with the backlight BL that illuminates the symbols stopped at the upper stage stop position, the middle stage stop position, and the lower stage stop position in each of the reels 13a to 13c. The backlight BL is disposed on the inner side of the translucent films of the reels 13a to 13c, and illuminates each stop position from the inside of the translucent film. That is, in the slot machine 10, the backlight BL is installed behind the reels. Incidentally, the backlight BL illuminates the stop position of the symbol on the rotating reel when each of the reels 13a to 13c is rotating. Thus, by illuminating the stop position of the symbol on the rotating reel, as compared with the case where the stop position of the symbol on the rotating reel is not illuminated, the symbol of the rotating reel is visually recognized. This makes it easier and improves visibility.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with a decorative lamp 15 on the front side of the open / close door 12. The decoration lamp 15 performs an effect (hereinafter, referred to as an emission effect) of emitting, blinking and extinguishing the built-in light emitting body as one of the effects. The slot machine 10 is provided with a speaker 16 on the front side of the open / close door 12 for outputting sound. The speaker 16 executes, as one of the effects, an effect (hereinafter, referred to as sound effect) of outputting sounds such as human voice, sound effects, and music. For example, the sound output from the speaker 16 includes background music (so-called BGM) and the like.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with a medal insertion slot 17 on the front of the open / close door 12 for inserting a medal. The slot machine 10 has a medal selector inside the machine. The medal selector includes an insertion sensor SE4 that detects a medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 17 (shown in FIG. 9). In addition, the slot machine 10 is provided with a bet button 18 on the front surface of the open / close door 12. The bet button 18 is a means for betting medals (hereinafter referred to as bets) from credits stored internally in the slot machine 10. In the following description, betting on medals may be indicated as "betting" and the bet number may be indicated as "bet number". In addition, the slot machine 10 is provided with a settlement button 19 as a settlement operation means on the front surface of the open / close door 12. The settlement button 19 is a means to be operated when the bet medals or credits stored internally in the slot machine 10 are settled (at the time of refunding).

  The slot machine 10 is provided with a start lever 20 as a start operation unit on the front surface of the open / close door 12. The start lever 20 is a means for performing a start operation to start the rotation of the reels 13a to 13c. That is, the reception of the start operation is an opportunity to start the fluctuation game. Further, the operation of the start lever 20 for starting the rotation (operation) of the reels (starting the fluctuation game) corresponds to the start operation, and the slot machine 10 starts the fluctuation game based on the start operation.

The slot machine 10 is provided with a left stop button 21 a (first stop button) on the front surface of the open / close door 12. The left stop button 21a corresponds to the left reel 13a, and is a means for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of the left reel 13a. The slot machine 10 is provided with a middle stop button 21 b (second stop button) on the front surface of the open / close door 12. The middle stop button 21b corresponds to the middle reel 13b, and is a means for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of the middle reel 13b. The slot machine 10 is provided with a right stop button 21 c (third stop button) on the front surface of the open / close door 12. The right stop button 21c corresponds to the right reel 13c, and is means for performing a stop operation to stop the rotation of the right reel 13c. As described above, the stop buttons 21a to 21c correspond to the respective reels. The stop buttons 21a to 21c correspond to stop operation units, respectively. That is, in the slot machine 10, there are a plurality of stop operation units. Thus, the slot machine 10 is configured to be able to stop the rotation of the reel in response to the operation of the stop button. In addition, the operation of the stop button for stopping the rotating reel corresponds to the stop operation. Then, in the slot machine 10, the rotation of the reels is stopped based on the stop operation.

  The slot machine 10 is provided with a medal payout port 22 at the lower part of the front of the open / close door 12. The slot machine 10 includes a tray 23 for receiving the medals paid out from the medal payout opening 22. The slot machine 10 is provided with a hopper unit HU (shown in FIG. 9) capable of paying out medals from the medal payout opening 22 inside the machine. The medal inserted from the medal insertion slot 17 passes through the medal selector and is stored by the hopper unit HU.

  In the slot machine 10, a heart movable body 25 corresponding to a specific movable body is provided on the front surface of the open / close door 12. The heart movable body 25 is operable from an origin 25a to a movable reaching position 25b. The heart movable body 25 operates on the front side of the effect display device 14 when operating to the movable reaching position. The heart movable body 25 operates in response to an operation from the first actuator A1 (shown in FIG. 9). The slot machine 10 also has a star movable body 26 on the front of the open / close door 12. The star movable body 26 is operable from an origin 26a to a movable arrival position 26b. The star movable body 26 does not operate on the front side of the effect display device 14 even when moving to the movable reaching position. The star movable body 26 operates in response to an operation from the second actuator A2 (shown in FIG. 9).

The slot machine 10 has an effect button EB on the front of the open / close door 12 that can be operated by the player.
As shown in FIG. 2, the effect button EB is composed of a selection button SB and a menu button MB. The selection button SB includes an upper button SBa, a right button SBb, a lower button SBc, a left button SBd, and a determination button SBe. The menu button MB is juxtaposed to the selection button SB.

The slot machine 10 includes an information panel 30 on the front of the open / close door 12 that can display predetermined information.
As shown in FIG. 3, the information panel 30 includes an insertable display unit 31. The insertable display unit 31 displays, for example, whether the medal can be inserted depending on the lighting state of the light emitter. The information panel 30 includes a replay display unit 32. The replay display unit 32 displays, for example, whether the game is replayed (replay) according to the lighting state of the light emitter. The re-game will be described later. The information panel 30 includes a weight display unit 33. The weight display unit 33 displays, for example, whether the wait time is in progress by the lighting state of the light emitter. The wait time is the shortest game time (shortest game time) set so that the number of times of execution of the fluctuation game per unit time does not exceed a predetermined number of times. The information panel 30 includes a status display unit 34. The status display unit 34 displays, for example, an error code or the like so that an error occurring in the slot machine 10 can be identified.

The information panel 30 includes a bet display unit 35. The bet display unit 35 includes three light emitting units. The bet display unit 35 displays the bet number (the bet number) according to the lighting state of the three light emitting units. When the bet number is “1”, one of the three light emitting units constituting the bet display unit 35 is turned on, and the remaining two light emitting units are turned off. When the bet number is “2”, two of the three light emitting units constituting the bet display unit 35 are lighted, and the remaining light emitting unit is turned off. When the bet number is “3”, all the light emitting units constituting the bet display unit 35 are lit.

  The information panel 30 includes a credit display unit 36. The credit display unit 36 is configured to include two 7-segment displays arranged in line. The credit display unit 36 displays the number of medals stored as credits inside the machine. Thus, the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to store the number of medals (game media) as a credit.

  The information panel 30 includes a payout display unit 37. The payout display unit 37 is configured to include two 7-segment displays arranged to line up. Thus, the payout display unit 37 is configured to include two 7-segment displays arranged in line. The payout display unit 37 displays information (hereinafter referred to as payout information) regarding the number of medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of a winning in the variation game. In the variation game, the number of medals paid out due to the occurrence of a prize in the variation game is not the number of medals actually paid out from the medal payout opening 22, but is also the number of medals added to the credits. It can be said that it is the number of medals awarded by the occurrence of a prize. The payout display unit 37 displays information on the operation mode of the stop buttons 21a to 21c (hereinafter referred to as operation information) while the variation game is being executed. Thus, the payout display unit 37 that displays the payout information is also used as a display unit that displays (notifies) the operation information. The operation information corresponds to information on the operation mode of the stop operation unit. In addition, the pressing order of the stop button corresponds to the operating order of the stop operation unit.

  As shown in FIG. 4, in the operation order of the stop buttons 21 a to 21 c (hereinafter sometimes referred to as pressing order), different stop buttons for performing the first stop operation, the second stop operation and the third stop operation are pressed As the order, there are all six ways from the first pushing order to the sixth pushing order. For example, the first pressing order is a pressing order in which the stop buttons 21a to 21c are operated such that the rotation is stopped in the order of the left reel 13a, the middle reel 13b, and the right reel 13c. In FIG. 4, when indicating the pressing order, the left stop button 21a is indicated as "left", the middle stop button 21b as "middle", and the right stop button 21c as "right". For example, the first push order is indicated as "left middle right". FIG. 4 shows a reel whose rotation is stopped by the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation. For example, in the case of the first pressing order, the rotation of the left reel 13a is stopped by the first stop operation, the rotation of the middle reel 13b is stopped by the second stop operation, and the rotation of the right reel 13c is stopped by the third stop operation. It is shown that. The first pressing order “left middle right” and the second pressing order “left right middle” correspond to the pressing order in which the left stop button 21 a is first operated among the stop buttons 21 a to 21 c. The third pressing order “middle left and right” and the fourth pressing order “middle right and left” correspond to the pressing order in which the middle stop button 21 b is first operated among the stop buttons 21 a to 21 c. The fifth pressing order “right / left middle” and the sixth pressing order “right middle left” correspond to the pressing order in which the right stop button 21 c is first operated among the stop buttons 21 a to 21 c.

Next, based on FIG. 5, symbol combinations for which a prize is determined will be described. In addition, the symbol combination for which the award is determined is also referred to as a "role".
In the symbol combination (combination) for which the award is determined, the symbol combination (bonus combination) for which the bonus is defined as the award, the symbol combination (disbursement combination) for which the payout of medals is determined as the award and the symbol combination There is a (replay role). Replay is that it is possible to start the next variation game without having to bet medals.

In the bonus combination, an award of a bonus gaming state (bonus state) is defined as a prize. On the other hand, in the bonus role, payout of medals and replay are not defined as a prize. As described above, the slot machine 10 is configured to be capable of generating a bonus gaming state as a special state. In the following description, a symbol combination stopped on the effective line YL when a bonus combination is won is referred to as a "bonus stop point". In the present embodiment, the bonus stop number corresponds to the special display result. As shown in FIG. 5, the bonus combinations include, for example, a first bonus combination, a second bonus combination and a single bonus combination. In the following description, among the first bonus combination, the second bonus combination, and the single bonus combination, the first bonus combination and the second bonus combination may be collectively shown as a specific bonus combination.

  In the first bonus combination, an awarding of a first bonus gaming state (first bonus state) is determined as a prize. In the following description, a symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL when the first bonus combination is won is referred to as “first bonus stop point”. In the present embodiment, the first bonus gaming state ends when the number of medals paid out in the first bonus gaming state exceeds 236. As described above, the termination condition of the first bonus gaming state is satisfied when the number of medals paid out in the first bonus gaming state exceeds 236.

  In the second bonus combination, an award of a second bonus gaming state (second bonus state) is determined as a prize. In the following description, a symbol combination stopped on the activated line YL when the second bonus combination is won is referred to as “second bonus stop point”. In the present embodiment, the second bonus gaming state ends when the number of medals paid out in the second bonus gaming state exceeds 86. As described above, the termination condition of the second bonus gaming state is satisfied when the number of medals paid out in the second bonus gaming state exceeds 86.

  In the single bonus role, an award of a single bonus gaming state (single bonus state) is defined as a prize. In the following description, a symbol combination stopped on the effective line YL when a single bonus combination is won is referred to as “single bonus stop point”. In the present embodiment, the single bonus gaming state ends when one variation game is played in the single bonus gaming state. That is, the single bonus gaming state ends when one game ends in the single bonus gaming state. As described above, the termination condition of the single bonus gaming state is satisfied when one game is ended in the single bonus gaming state.

  The number of fluctuation games in the first bonus gaming state and the number of fluctuation games in the second bonus gaming state are more than one. Thus, while the number of games in the single bonus gaming state is one, the number of games in the first bonus gaming state and the second bonus gaming state is greater than one. Therefore, the number of games in the single bonus gaming state is the smallest among the plurality of bonus gaming states. In the slot machine 10, the number of medals that can be acquired when the first bonus gaming state is generated, the number of medals that can be acquired when the second bonus gaming state is generated, and the single bonus gaming state Is more than the number of medals that can be obtained if Further, in the slot machine 10, the number of medals that can be acquired when the second bonus gaming state is generated is larger than the number of medals that can be acquired when the single bonus gaming state is generated. That is, the number of medals that can be acquired when the single bonus gaming state is generated among the plurality of types of bonus gaming states is the smallest. In the present embodiment, at least one of the first bonus gaming state and the second bonus gaming state corresponds to the first special state, and the single bonus gaming state corresponds to the second special state. And, in the present embodiment, at least one of the first bonus stop and the second bonus stop corresponds to the first special display result, and the single bonus stop corresponds to the second special display result. Further, in the present embodiment, the bonus game state corresponds to the advantageous state.

For the payout role, the payout of medals is determined as a prize. As shown in FIG. 5, the payout roles include, for example, a cherry role, a watermelon role, a bell role and a one-piece role.
In the role of cherry, payout of a predetermined number of medals (in the present embodiment, "two") is determined as a prize. In the following description, a symbol combination stopped on the effective line YL when a cherry combination is won is referred to as a "cherry stopped eye". In the watermelon combination, payout of a predetermined number of medals (in the present embodiment, "three") is determined as a prize. In the following description, a symbol combination stopped on the effective line YL when the watermelon combination is won is referred to as “watermelon stop point”. In the bell combination, payout of a predetermined number of medals ("10" in the present embodiment) is determined as a prize. In the following description, a symbol combination stopped on the effective line YL when the bell combination is won is referred to as a “bell stopped eye”. The payout of a predetermined number of medals (in the present embodiment, “one sheet”) is determined for the one-piece combination. In the following description, a symbol combination stopped on the effective line YL when one winning combination is won is referred to as a “bell spill stop point”. In the present embodiment, the number of medals paid out is not the number of medals actually paid out from the medal payout opening 22, but includes the number of medals added as credits, and the medals awarded to the player Corresponds to the number of

  In the re-play role, a re-play is determined as a prize. The replay role is also referred to as a replay role. In the following description, symbol combinations that are stopped on the effective line YL when the replay player wins are indicated as “replay stop eyes”. As shown in FIG. 5, the replay player has, for example, a regular replay player and a promotion replay player. In the following description, symbol combinations that are stopped on the effective line YL when the normal replay role is won are indicated as “normal replay stop eyes”. In addition, the symbol combination stopped on the effective line YL when the promotion player character wins is indicated as "promotion re-game stop eye".

The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to control the gaming state.
As shown in FIG. 6, the gaming states in the slot machine 10 include a first gaming state, a second gaming state, a carryover gaming state, a first bonus gaming state, a second bonus gaming state, and a single bonus gaming state.

  In the slot machine 10, when the first bonus combination does not win in the variation game in which the first bonus combination is allowed to be won by the lottery, the first bonus combination is allowed (the first bonus combination is made Winning) is carried over. In the present embodiment, after the winning of the first bonus combination is permitted in the combination lottery, the winning of the first bonus combination continues to be permitted until the first bonus combination is won. In the slot machine 10, after the winning of the first bonus combination is permitted in the winning combination, the winning of the first bonus combination continues to be permitted even from the next variation game. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, if the second bonus combination does not win in the variation game in which the second bonus combination is allowed to be won by the lottery, the second bonus combination is allowed (second The bonus part is won). In the present embodiment, after the winning of the second bonus combination is permitted in the winning combination, the winning of the second bonus combination continues to be permitted until the second bonus combination is won. In the slot machine 10, after the winning of the second bonus combination is permitted in the winning combination, the winning of the second bonus combination continues to be permitted even from the next variation game. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, when the single bonus combination is not won in the variation game in which the single bonus combination is permitted among the bonus combinations, the single bonus combination is allowed to be won (single bonus combination winning). It is not carried over.

  In the slot machine 10, when the first bonus combination is not won in the variation game in which the first bonus combination is permitted, that is, when the first bonus combination is carried over, the transition to the carryover gaming state is made. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, if the second bonus combination is not won in the variation game in which the second bonus combination is permitted to be won, that is, if the second bonus combination is carried over, the game proceeds to the carryover gaming state Transition. Thus, in the slot machine 10, when the winning of the specific bonus combination is carried over, the gaming machine 10 shifts to the carryover gaming state.

  The second gaming state in the slot machine 10 is a gaming state in which the winning of the replay role is more easily accepted than in the first gaming state. Therefore, in the second gaming state, the consumption of medals is suppressed as compared to the first gaming state. Therefore, the second gaming state can be said to be advantageous over the first gaming state. The second gaming state is a so-called "replay time (RT)". Then, in the slot machine 10, when the promotion replay role is won in the first gaming state, the gaming machine 10 shifts to the second gaming state. In addition, in the slot machine 10, when one winning combination is won in the second gaming state, the game machine shifts to the first gaming state.

  In the slot machine 10, when the first bonus combination is won, it shifts to the first bonus gaming state. In the slot machine 10, the first bonus gaming state is generated by shifting to the first bonus gaming state. Then, in the slot machine 10, when the termination condition of the first bonus gaming state is satisfied in the first bonus gaming state, the gaming machine 10 shifts to the first gaming state. In addition, in the slot machine 10, when the second bonus combination is won, it shifts to the second bonus gaming state. In the slot machine 10, the second bonus gaming state is generated by shifting to the second bonus gaming state. Then, in the slot machine 10, when the termination condition of the second bonus gaming state is satisfied in the second bonus gaming state, the gaming machine 10 shifts to the first gaming state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the single bonus combination is won, the state shifts to the single bonus gaming state. In the slot machine 10, the single bonus gaming state is generated by shifting to the single bonus gaming state. Then, in the slot machine 10, when the termination condition of the single bonus gaming state is satisfied in the single bonus gaming state, the slot machine 10 shifts to the first gaming state. Thus, in the present embodiment, the special status is generated after the special display result is derived.

  The bonus gaming state in the slot machine 10 has a higher probability of winning the payout in the winning combination, as compared to the gaming states other than the bonus gaming state. In addition, the winning probability of the payout combination means the probability that the winning combination of the payout combination is permitted. As described above, in the bonus gaming state, the frequency of acquiring medals is improved as compared to gaming states other than the bonus gaming state. Therefore, the bonus gaming state can be said to be advantageous over gaming states other than the bonus gaming state.

  In addition, that the winning of a bonus combination is permitted in the combination drawing is also said to be won as a bonus combination. In addition, it is also said that the winning of the bonus combination is carried over if the winning of the bonus combination is allowed. The carryover gaming state is also referred to as "inside". On the other hand, the first gaming state and the second gaming state are also referred to as "non-internal". In addition, in a gaming state other than the bonus gaming state, when the carryover gaming state in which the winning of the bonus combination is continued is allowed as the carryover state, the first gaming state and the second gaming state in which the winning of the bonus combination is not continued It can be said that it is a state. Incidentally, the bonus game state is also referred to as "in-game", and the game state other than the bonus game state is also referred to as "non-in-game".

  The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to control an effect state as an effect mode. There are multiple types of effect states. In each effect state, effect state identification information that can identify the effect state (the effect state being controlled) during stay is notified. In the slot machine 10, for example, a different background image is displayed on the effect display device 14 for each type of effect state, the decoration lamp 15 is made to emit light in different emission colors for each type of effect state, or for each type of effect state. A different piece of music (for example, background music) is output to the speaker 16 to notify the effect state identification information. Therefore, the player can recognize the state of effect during the stay from the background image displayed on the effect display device 14, the light emission color of the decoration lamp 15, the music output from the speaker 16, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 7, the effect states in the slot machine 10 include a normal effect state, a preparation effect state, an advantageous effect state, and a bonus effect state. The advantageous rendering states in the slot machine 10 include a first advantageous rendering state, a second advantageous rendering state, and a special advantageous rendering state. The bonus effect states in the slot machine 10 include a first bonus effect state and a second bonus effect state.

  The normal effect state and the preparation effect state are mainly effect states to stay when in the first gaming state. The first advantageous rendering state, the second advantageous rendering state, and the special advantageous rendering state are mainly rendering states to stay when in the second gaming state. The first bonus effect state is an effect state in which the user stays in the first bonus game state. The second bonus effect state is an effect state in which the user stays in the second bonus game state.

  In the slot machine 10, for example, a navigation effect (operation-related effect) for notifying an operation mode (operation timing and operation order) of a stop button for stopping a symbol combination for which a prize is determined on the effective line YL is executed. . The navigation effect is also referred to as an operation navigation effect (operation navigation) or a pushing order navigation effect (pushing order navigation). Then, in the slot machine 10, in the advantageous rendering state, the ratio at which the navigation effect is executed with contents advantageous to the player is higher than in the normal rendering state. Therefore, the advantageous rendering state is so-called "assist time (AT)".

  In particular, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the bell combination is permitted while being in the advantageous rendering state, the navi effect of notifying the pushing order for winning the bell combination is executed while the navigation is normally performed. When the bell combination is accepted while being in the effect state, the navigation effect for notifying of the pushing order for winning the bell combination is not executed. In the present embodiment, the pushing order for winning the bell combination corresponds to an operation capable of acquiring a profit. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the navigation effect for notifying the order of pushing for winning the bell combination corresponds to the guidance effect for guiding an operation capable of acquiring a profit. And, in the present embodiment, the advantageous rendering state in which the navigation effect for notifying the order of pushing for winning the bell combination is executed corresponds to the specific state in which the guidance effect for guiding the operation capable of acquiring a profit is executed. . As described above, the slot machine of this embodiment is configured to be able to cause a specific state.

  As shown in FIG. 7, in the slot machine 10, when the advantageous tolerance condition is satisfied in the normal effect state, the slot machine 10 shifts to the preparation effect state. Furthermore, in the slot machine 10, when the advantageous start condition is satisfied in the preparation effect state, the slot machine 10 shifts to the advantageous effect state. At this time, it shifts to the first advantageous rendering state among the advantageous rendering states. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the advantageous termination condition is satisfied in the advantageous rendering state, the slot machine 10 shifts to the normal rendering state.

  In the slot machine 10, when the advantage promotion condition is satisfied in the first advantageous rendering state, the slot machine 10 shifts to the second advantageous rendering state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the advantageous demotion condition is satisfied in the second advantageous rendering state, the slot machine 10 shifts to the first advantageous rendering state. Further, when the special advantageous condition is satisfied in the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state, the transition to the special advantageous rendering state is made. In the present embodiment, the advantageous rendering state corresponds to the advantageous state. That is, the advantageous state in the present embodiment includes a bonus gaming state and an advantageous rendering state.

  In the slot machine 10, when the specific bonus combination is won, it shifts to a bonus effect state. Specifically, in the slot machine 10, when the first bonus combination is won, it shifts to the first bonus effect state. Further, in the slot machine 10, when the second bonus combination is won, it shifts to the second bonus effect state.

In the slot machine 10, when the specific bonus end condition is satisfied in the bonus effect state, the effect is shifted to an effect state different from the bonus effect state. Specifically, in the slot machine 10, when the termination condition of the first bonus gaming state is satisfied in the first bonus rendering state, the gaming state is shifted to the first bonus rendering state before the transition to the rendering state. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, when the termination condition of the second bonus gaming state is satisfied in the second bonus rendering state, the gaming state is shifted to the second bonus rendering state before the transition to the rendering state. For example, when the first bonus combination is won and the first bonus effect state is entered when the second effect effect state is in effect, the second effect effect state is entered after the end of the first bonus effect state. When the second bonus combination is won and the second bonus effect state is entered while the normal effect state is in effect, the normal effect state is entered after the end of the second bonus effect state. Incidentally, in the slot machine 10, the rendering state does not shift even if the single bonus combination is won. For example, in the slot machine 10, even if the single bonus combination is won in the normal rendering state, the slot machine 10 stays in the normal rendering state. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, even if the single bonus combination is won in the advantageous rendering state, it stays in the advantageous rendering state.

  Further, in the slot machine 10, when the termination condition of the advantageous period is satisfied, the game machine shifts to the normal effect state. The advantage period includes a bonus effect state (bonus game state) and an effect effect state. That is, the advantageous period in the present embodiment includes the special state and the specific state. The advantageous period is a period in which the advantageous effect state and the bonus effect state are continuously controlled without being controlled to the normal effect state and the preparation effect state. The termination condition of the advantageous period is satisfied when the internally stored advantageous upper limit value reaches 0. In the slot machine 10, when the advantageous upper limit reaches 0 in the advantageous rendering state and the ending condition of the advantageous period is satisfied, the transition to the normal rendering state is made. In addition, when it is controlled to the first bonus effect state, that is, when the advantageous upper limit reaches 0 by the occurrence of the first bonus game state, it is controlled to the normal effect state after the end of the first bonus effect state. . At this time, even if the effect state before the transition to the first bonus effect state is the advantageous effect state, if the termination condition of the advantageous period is satisfied by the occurrence of the first bonus gaming state, the first bonus effect state After the end of the transition to the normal production state. Similarly, when the advantage upper limit reaches 0 by being controlled to the second bonus effect state, that is, when the second bonus game state is activated, it is controlled to the normal effect state after the end of the second bonus effect state. Ru. At this time, even if the effect state before shifting to the second bonus effect state is the advantageous effect state, if the end condition of the advantageous period is satisfied by the occurrence of the second bonus gaming state, the second bonus effect state After the end of the transition to the normal production state.

  In the present embodiment, the effect state controlled after the end of the bonus effect state corresponds to the special effect mode. In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect states controlled after the end of the bonus effect state include a normal effect state, a preparation effect state, and an effect effect state, which correspond to the special effect mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the effect state controlled after the end of the advantageous effect state corresponds to the specific effect mode. In the present specification, "termination of the advantageous rendering state" refers to the case where the bonus rendering state is controlled by the bonus gaming state being generated in the advantageous rendering state, and from the advantageous rendering state to the normal rendering state It means the case of transition. Therefore, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect state controlled after the end of the advantageous effect state is the normal effect state, and the normal effect state corresponds to the specific effect mode.

  The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to control an internal mode as an internal control state. The internal mode is also called an internal lottery state. There are multiple types of internal modes. Specifically, the internal modes include a first internal mode, a second internal mode, and a third internal mode.

  In the slot machine 10, the maximum number of fluctuation games (hereinafter, referred to as the number of ceilings) until the favorable tolerance condition is satisfied after the end of the advantageous rendering state is determined. The ceiling count corresponds to the upper limit count of the number of games required until the next advantageous rendering state is generated.

Similarly, in the slot machine 10, the number of ceilings is determined after the end of the first bonus effect state (first bonus game state) or the second bonus effect state (second bonus game state). Then, in the slot machine 10, the number of ceilings is determined at a rate according to the internal mode. In the slot machine 10, the range of the number of times of determination as the number of ceilings is determined according to the internal mode, and thereafter, the number of ceilings is determined under the equal probability or the substantially equal probability from the range of the number of determinations as the number of ceilings .

  As shown in FIG. 8A, in the third internal mode, the maximum number of times that can be determined as the number of ceilings is 128, while in the first internal mode or the second internal mode, the number of ceilings is The maximum number of times that can be determined is 999 times. For this reason, in the case of the third internal mode, if the variation game is executed up to 128 times after the end of the advantageous rendering state or the bonus rendering state, the advantageous permissible condition is satisfied. Therefore, the third internal mode can be said to be an advantageous internal mode as compared to the first internal mode and the second internal mode. Furthermore, in the second internal mode, the number of times of ceilings that is less likely to be determined is easier to determine than in the first internal mode. Therefore, the second internal mode can be said to be an advantageous internal mode as compared to the first internal mode.

  In the slot machine 10, after the end of the advantageous effect state, the internal mode is drawn. Specifically, in the slot machine 10, the internal mode of the transition destination is determined at a rate according to the current internal mode. The current internal mode corresponds to the internal mode before the transition, and the internal mode to the transition destination corresponds to the internal mode after the transition.

  As shown in FIG. 8B, in the second internal mode, the third internal mode is easily determined as the transition destination internal mode as compared to the first internal mode. Furthermore, when in the second internal mode, the first internal mode is not determined as the transition destination internal mode. As described above, in the second internal mode, an internal mode having a high degree of advantage is easily determined as the transition internal mode, as compared to the first internal mode. From this point of view as well, the second internal mode can be said to be an advantageous internal mode as compared to the first internal mode. Incidentally, when in the third internal mode, the second internal mode is not determined as the internal mode of the transition destination, the third internal mode is determined as the internal mode of the transition destination, and the third internal mode is continued, or A first internal mode is determined as an internal mode to which the transition is made, and it is determined to demote to the first internal mode.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, the third internal mode has a high advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state as compared with the first internal mode or the second internal mode. Further, in the slot machine 10, the second internal mode has a high degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous effect state as compared with the first internal mode. Thus, in the present embodiment, the second internal control state has a high degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state as compared to the first internal control state. In the present embodiment, when the third internal mode is set to the second internal control state, at least one of the first internal mode and the second internal mode corresponds to the first internal control state, and the second internal mode is set to the second internal control state. The first internal mode corresponds to the first internal control state when the control state is set.

Next, the electrical configuration of the slot machine 10 will be described.
As shown in FIG. 9, the slot machine 10 includes a main board 40 as a main control unit inside the machine. The main substrate 40 outputs a control signal (control command) according to the result of the processing. The slot machine 10 is provided with a sub substrate 41 as a sub control unit inside the device. The sub-substrate 41 performs predetermined processing based on the control information output from the main substrate 40. For example, the sub-substrate 41 performs processing for causing display effect by the effect display device 14, light emission effect by the decoration lamp 15, and sound effect by the speaker 16. The main substrate 40 is connected to the sub substrate 41. The main substrate 40 and the sub substrate 41 are connected so that control information can be output in one direction from the main substrate 40 to the sub substrate 41.

First, the main substrate 40 will be described in detail.
The main board 40 includes a main control CPU 40a, a main control ROM 40b, and a main control RAM 40c. The main control CPU 40a executes various processes by executing the main control program. The main control ROM 40 b stores a main control program, a lottery table used for a predetermined lottery, a determination value, and the like.

  The main control RAM 40 c is configured to be able to store various information which can be appropriately rewritten during the operation of the slot machine 10. The information stored in the main control RAM 40c includes, for example, a flag, a counter, and a timer. The information stored in the main control RAM 40c includes information on credit and the like. The main substrate 40 is configured to be capable of generating random numbers. For example, the random number may be generated as a hardware random number by mounting on the main substrate 40 a random number generation circuit that updates the value of the random number every predetermined cycle, and the main control CPU 40a generates random numbers every predetermined control cycle. It may be generated as a software random number by updating the value of.

  The main substrate 40 is connected to the reel sensors SE1 to SE3 and the closing sensor SE4. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to input detection signals output from the various sensors SE1 to SE4 through the ports. The main substrate 40 is connected to the actuators of the reels 13a to 13c. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to control the operation of each actuator of the reels 13a to 13c via the drive circuit.

  The main substrate 40 is connected to the bet button 18, the settlement button 19, the start lever 20, and the stop buttons 21a to 21c. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to input detection signals output from the bet button 18, the settlement button 19, the start lever 20, and the stop buttons 21a to 21c through the ports. The main substrate 40 is connected to the information panel 30. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to control the display content of the information panel 30 via the drive circuit.

  The main board 40 is connected to the set value switch 45. The main control CPU 40a is configured to be able to input an operation signal that is output when the set value switch 45 is operated through the port. The setting value switch 45 is configured to be operable by using a predetermined key. In the following description, the phrase "the setting value switch 45 is operated" means that the setting value switch 45 is operated using a predetermined key. The set value switch 45 is provided on the rear side (rear side) of the open / close door 12.

  The set value can be set by operating the set value switch 45 when the power supply to the slot machine 10 is started. The set value is configured in a plurality of stages, and any set value can be set. That is, the slot machine 10 can change the set value by operating the set value switch 45. The setting values in the present embodiment include “1”, “2” and “3”, and any one of “1” to “3” can be set as the setting value. In the present embodiment, an operation of changing the set value by operating the set value switch 45 along with the start of the power supply corresponds to the setting change operation.

In the slot machine 10, a winning lottery is performed under the winning probability based on the set value. Then, in the slot machine 10, the degree of advantage is different depending on the set value, and the machine ratio is different. In the slot machine 10, the winning probability of the bonus combination, that is, the probability that the winning combination of the bonus combination is permitted in the winning combination, differs depending on the set value. In the present embodiment, that the winning of the bonus combination is permitted in the combination lottery corresponds to that the lottery result of the combination lottery becomes a special result. And, in the present embodiment, the probability that the winning of the bonus combination is permitted in the combination lottery corresponds to the probability that the lottery result of the combination lottery will be the special result. In the following description, the probability that the bonus combination is permitted to be won in the combination lottery may be referred to as the "bonus combination winning probability". Then, the probability that the first bonus combination is permitted to be won in the winning combination is "the probability of winning the first bonus combination", and the probability that the second bonus combination is allowed to be won in the combination lottery is "the winning probability of the second bonus combination There is a case in which the probability that a single bonus combination is permitted to be won in the combination lottery may be referred to as the “single bonus combination winning probability”.

  As shown in FIG. 10, in the combination lottery in which the setting value is “1” in the slot machine 10, the winning probability of the first bonus combination is “1/240” and the winning probability of the second bonus combination is “1”. / 320 ", the winning probability of the single bonus role is" 1/100 ". Further, in the combination lottery where the setting value is “2” in the slot machine 10, the winning probability of the first bonus combination is “1/230”, and the winning probability of the second bonus combination is “1/300”, the single The winning probability of the bonus combination is "1/100". Further, in the combination lottery where the setting value is “3” in the slot machine 10, the winning probability of the first bonus combination is “1/200”, the winning probability of the second bonus combination is “1/300”, and the single The winning probability of the bonus combination is "1/100". As described above, in the slot machine 10, the probability of winning the bonus combination in the combination drawing when the setting value is "1" is the bonus in the combination drawing when the setting value is "2" or "3". Lower than the probability of winning the role. Further, in the slot machine 10, the probability of winning the bonus combination in the winning combination when the setting value is “2” is based on the probability of winning the bonus combination in the combination drawing when the setting value is “3”. Too low. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the set value is the first set value, the probability that the lottery result of the combination lottery is a special result is that when the set value is the second set value, the lottery result of the combination lottery is Less than the probability of a special outcome. In the present embodiment, at least one of “2” and “3” corresponds to the second set value when the first set value is “1”, and “2” when the first set value is “2”. "3" corresponds to the second set value.

  Here, among the lottery tables stored in the main control ROM 40b, the combination lottery table used in the internal lottery for determining a winning number from among a plurality of winning numbers will be described and the winning number. Hereinafter, the internal lottery for determining the winning number will be referred to as a part lottery. The winning number determined in the role lottery is also referred to as a conditional device combination. For this reason, the role lottery can be said to be a "condition device combination lottery". In the following description, the phrase "a predetermined winning number is determined in a role lottery" may be expressed as "a user is elected to a predetermined winning number in a role lottery".

  The winning number is control information in which one or more symbol combinations are defined as symbol combinations that can be derived (displayed) on the activated line YL. That is, the winning number is a condition device identifier in which one or more roles are defined as a combination capable of winning in the variable game. In the present embodiment, for example, the winning number to which the bonus combination is permitted, the winning number to which the cherry combination is permitted, the winning number to which the watermelon combination is permitted, and the bell combination are permitted. Includes a winning number to be played and a winning number to which the player of the re-playing role can be paid.

  In the present embodiment, the winning number to which the bonus combination is permitted is the winning number to which the first bonus combination is permitted, the winning number to which the second bonus combination is permitted, and the single bonus combination. There are winning numbers that are acceptable for winning.

In the present embodiment, winning the winning number for which the winning of the bonus combination is permitted corresponds to winning the bonus combination in the winning combination, and corresponds to the drawing of the winning combination being a special result. The “probability of winning a bonus combination” in the combination lottery corresponds to the probability of winning a winning number at which the bonus combination is permitted to be won in the combination lottery. In addition, winning on the winning number to which the first bonus combination is permitted corresponds to winning the first bonus combination in the combination lottery. The “probability of winning the first bonus combination” in the above-described role lottery corresponds to the probability of winning the winning number at which the winning of the first bonus combination is permitted in the role lottery. Similarly, winning the winning number for which the second bonus combination is permitted is the second winning in the winning combination.
It corresponds to winning a bonus combination. The “probability of winning the second bonus combination” in the above-described role lottery corresponds to the probability of winning the winning number at which the winning of the second bonus combination is permitted in the role lottery. In addition, winning a winning number for which a single bonus winning combination is permitted is equivalent to winning a single bonus winning combination in a winning combination. The “single bonus combination winning probability” in the above-described role lottery corresponds to the probability of winning a winning number that permits a single bonus combination to be won in the role lottery.

  The winning number to which the bonus combination is permitted may not be the winning number to which only the bonus combination among the plurality of combinations is permitted. For example, the cherry combination and the first bonus combination are permitted. The winning number may be a winning number or a winning number in which a winning combination of the second game and the second bonus is permitted. In the slot machine 10, when the winning of the bonus combination is permitted, if the winnings of the other payouts or the re-playing combination are allowed, the winnings of the other payouts or the re-playing combination are given priority, and the bonus The winnings will be carried over to the next and subsequent fluctuation games.

  In the present embodiment, the winning numbers for which the winning of the bell combination is permitted include the winning number for which the winning for only the bell combination is permitted, and the winning number for which the winning combination of one sheet is permitted in addition to the bell combination. is there. The winning sequence for which the combination of the bell and the single winning combination is permitted includes the operating sequence of the stop button (pushing order) for winning the bell combination and the operating sequence of the stop button for winning the single winning combination. In order), and, different winning numbers are included. For example, when the stop button is operated in a predetermined operation order, the bell combination will be awarded to the winning numbers for which the combination of the bell combination and the single combination is permitted, but the operation order is different from the predetermined operation order. When the stop button is operated, there is a winning number for winning one winning combination.

  In the present embodiment, the winning numbers for which the winnings of the re-playing part are permitted are the winning numbers for which the winnings for the normal re-playing part are permitted, and the winnings for which the normal re-playing part and the promoted re-playing part are permitted. There is a number. For the winning number to which the normal replay player and the promotion player are allowed to win, the operation sequence (pushing order) of the stop button for winning the normal replay player, and the operation for winning the promotion replay player The order (pushing order) includes different winning numbers. For example, when the stop button is operated in a predetermined operation order, the normal replay part will be awarded to the winning numbers for which the normal replaying role and the promotion replaying role are permitted to be won, while There is a winning number on which the promotion replay role is won when the stop button is operated in a different operation order.

  In the following description, the case where the winning number for which the winning of the first bonus combination is accepted is won in the role lottery is indicated as "when the winning of the first bonus combination is permitted". Further, the case where the winning number for which the winning of the second bonus combination is permitted is won in the winning combination is indicated as "when the winning of the second bonus combination is permitted". Further, the case where the winning number for which the winning of the single bonus role is permitted is won in the role lottery is indicated as “when the winning of the single bonus role is permitted”. Further, the case where the player wins a winning number for which the winning of the cherry role is permitted in the role lottery is indicated as "when the winning of the cherry role is permitted". Further, the case where the watermelon number is won to the winning number which allows the winning of the watermelon combination is shown as "when the winning of the watermelon combination is accepted". Similarly, a case in which a winning combination in which a bell combination is permitted is won in a part drawing is indicated as "a case in which a bell combination is permitted". Further, the case where the player wins the winning number for which the winning of the re-playing combination is permitted is indicated as “when the winning of the re-playing combination is permitted”. Further, the case where the player wins the winning number for which the normal replays and the promoted replays are permitted to be won is indicated as "when the promotion of the promoted replays is permitted".

There are a plurality of types of role lottery tables in the slot machine 10. In the slot machine 10, a combination lottery table corresponding to the gaming state is used in the combination lottery. In the role lottery table in the present embodiment, a first role lottery table used in the role lottery in the first gaming state, a second role lottery table used in the role lottery in the second gaming state, and a role lottery in the carryover gaming state There is a third role lottery table used in Further, in the combination lottery table in the present embodiment, a fourth combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in the first bonus gaming state, a fifth combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in the second bonus gaming state, and a single bonus There is a sixth combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in the gaming state. The slot machine 10 is provided with a first combination lottery table to a sixth combination lottery table for each set value. For example, among the first combination lottery table to the sixth combination lottery table, the first combination lottery table to the third combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in the gaming state other than the bonus gaming state are provided for each set value The fourth to sixth combination lottery tables used in the combination lottery in the bonus gaming state may not be prepared for each set value. In addition, the combination lottery table used in the combination lottery in the gaming state of a part or all of the first bonus gaming state, the second bonus gaming state and the single bonus gaming state may be made common. For example, the fourth combination lottery table may be used in the combination lottery in the first bonus gaming state and the second bonus gaming state.

  In the role lottery table, a value of a random number (hereinafter, referred to as a random number for a role lottery) used for the role lottery with respect to the winning number that can be determined is a numerical value within a range that can be taken as a value of the random number for the role lottery. A predetermined number of them are distributed among

  In the fourth part lottery table to the sixth part lottery table, it is possible to increase the probability of adding together the determination rates of the winning numbers for which the winning of the bell combination is permitted compared to the first to third lottery tables. , The value of the random number for the role lottery is distributed. As a result, in the bonus gaming state, winning of the bell combination is more easily permitted than in the gaming states other than the bonus gaming state. By the way, in the present embodiment, in the fourth combination lottery table to the sixth combination random selection table, among the winning numbers which are permitted to win the bell combination, it is possible to win only to the winning numbers which are permitted to only the bell combination. The value of the role lottery random number is distributed to

  In the slot machine 10, when none of the winning numbers is won in the winning combination, that is, when the winning combination of the winning combination is not permitted, the lottery result of the winning combination is “off”. And, when the lottery result of the part lottery is out, there is no case that the symbol combination in which the award is determined based on the lottery result of the part lottery is derived. However, when the winning of the specific bonus combination is carried over and the lottery result of the combination lottery is out, it is possible to win the specific bonus combination carried over.

  In the slot machine 10, when the first bonus combination is carried over, if the lottery result of the combination lottery is out, the stop buttons 21a to 21c are at the stop operation position where the first bonus stop can be derived. When operated, the reels 13a to 13c are stopped so that the first bonus stop point is derived. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, when the first bonus combination is carried over, if the lottery result of the combination lottery is out, the stop operation position other than the stop operation position where the first bonus stop can be derived When the stop buttons 21a to 21c are operated, the reels 13a to 13c are stopped so that out-of-focus stops for which a prize is not determined are derived. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, when the second bonus combination is carried over, if the lottery result of the combination lottery is out, the stop button 21a at the stop operation position where the second bonus stop can be derived When .about.21c is operated, the reels 13a.about.13c are stopped so that the second bonus stop is derived. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, when the winning result of the second bonus combination is carried over, if the lottery result of the combination lottery is out, the stop operation position other than the stop operation position where the second bonus stop can be derived When the stop buttons 21a to 21c are operated, the reels 13a to 13c are stopped so that out-of-focus stops for which a prize is not determined are derived.

Next, the sub-substrate 41 will be described in detail.
As shown in FIG. 9, the sub board 41 includes a sub control CPU 41a, a sub control ROM 41b, and a sub control RAM 41c. For example, the sub control CPU 41a performs various processing (for example, processing related to effects) by executing the sub control program. The sub control ROM 41 b stores a sub control program, a lottery table used for lottery, a determination value, and the like. The sub control ROM 41 b stores display effect data related to display effects in the effect display device 14. The sub control ROM 41 b stores light emission effect data on the light emission effect of the decoration lamp 15. The sub control ROM 41 b stores sound effect data relating to sound effects in the speaker 16.

  The sub control RAM 41 c is configured to be able to store various information which can be appropriately rewritten during the operation of the slot machine 10. The information stored in the sub control RAM 41 c includes, for example, a flag, a counter, and a timer. The sub-substrate 41 is configured to be capable of generating a random number. For example, the random number may be generated as a hardware random number by mounting on the sub substrate 41 a random number generation circuit that updates the value of the random number every predetermined cycle, and the sub control CPU 41a generates a random number every predetermined control cycle. It may be generated as a software random number by updating the value of.

  The sub substrate 41 is connected to the effect display device 14, the decoration lamp 15, and the speaker 16. The sub control CPU 41a is configured to be able to control the effect display device 14, the decoration lamp 15, and the speaker 16 via the drive circuit.

  The sub-substrate 41 is connected to the selection button SB and the menu button MB. The sub control CPU 41a is configured to be able to input detection signals output from the selection button SB and the menu button MB via the port. Further, the sub board 41 is connected to the volume adjuster 47. The sub control CPU 41a is configured to be able to input a signal indicating the maximum volume set by the operation of the volume adjuster 47 via the port. The slot machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to be able to set the maximum volume of the sound output from the speaker 16 within a predetermined range by operating the volume adjuster 47. The volume adjuster 47 is disposed on the back side of the open / close door 12.

  The sub-substrate 41 is connected to the backlight BL. The sub control CPU 41a is configured to be able to control the backlight BL via a drive circuit. The sub substrate 41 is connected to the first actuator A1, and the sub control CPU 41a is configured to be able to control the operation of the first actuator A1 via the drive circuit. In this embodiment, the sub control CPU 41a controls the operation of the first actuator A1 to control the operation of the heart movable body 25 corresponding to the specific movable body, thereby controlling the operation of the specific movable body. A function as a means is realized. The sub substrate 41 is connected to the second actuator A2, and the sub control CPU 41a is configured to be able to control the operation of the second actuator A2 via the drive circuit.

  A volume flag is stored in the sub control RAM 41 c. In the volume flag, a value capable of specifying a reference volume as a reference is set. The reference sound volume may be, for example, the maximum sound volume or the minimum sound volume that can be output from the speaker 16, or may be the range of the sound volume that can be output from the speaker 16. Further, the reference volume may be a magnification that amplifies the volume that is the basis of performing the sound effect. In the present embodiment, in the volume flag, a value capable of specifying the volume within the range of the maximum volume set by the volume adjuster 47 is set. The volume flag in the present embodiment includes a first volume flag corresponding to a sound effect and a character voice, and a second volume flag corresponding to background music. When the volume adjuster 47 is operated, values capable of specifying the volume within the range of the maximum volume set by the operation of the volume adjuster 47 are set in the first volume flag and the second volume flag, respectively. .

Next, processing executed by the main control CPU 40 a of the main substrate 40 will be described.
When the set value switch 45 is operated along with the start of power supply to the slot machine 10, the main control CPU 40a can identify the set value set by the operation of the set value switch 45 (hereinafter referred to as the set value) Is stored in the main control RAM 40c. Further, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a set value command) capable of specifying the set value that has been set in an output buffer. The control information (command) stored in the output buffer is output to the sub board 41 in the next and subsequent interrupt processing. In the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs a process of storing the set value information in the main control RAM 40c based on the operation of changing the set value by operating the set value switch 45 with the start of power supply. The function as setting value means is realized.

The processing performed by the main control CPU 40a includes game progress main processing.
As shown in FIG. 11, in the game progress main process, the main control CPU 40a performs a game start set process (step S101). In the game start set process, the main control CPU 40a stores information related to the gaming state of the slot machine 10, and erases or updates the upper part of a predetermined storage area in the main control RAM 40c. Next, the main control CPU 40a starts the medal bet acceptance (step S102). Next, the main control CPU 40a checks the gaming state (step S103).

  Next, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the re-playing operation is in progress (step S104). The replaying operation time corresponds to the time when replaying is given. When it is not during replay operation (step S104: NO), the main control CPU 40a performs medal management processing for setting the number of bets in the current variation game (step S105). When the bet number is set in step S105, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a bet number setting command) capable of specifying that the bet number is set in the output buffer. Note that it is also possible to specify the set bet number from the bet number setting command of the present embodiment. In step S105, when the detection signal from the bet button 18 is input, the main control CPU 40a adds the bet number so that the bet number stored in the main control RAM 40c becomes the defined bet number X, and the addition amount The credits stored in the main control RAM 40c are subtracted. When the main control CPU 40a receives the detection signal from the insertion sensor SE4 in step S105, the number of bets is increased by one. At this time, when the bet number has reached the defined bet number X, the main control CPU 40a adds 1 to the credit stored in the main control RAM 40c, and updates the credit. Furthermore, at this time, when the credit has reached the upper limit number of credits, the main control CPU 40a drives the hopper unit HU to pay out one medal.

  If the main control CPU 40a is in replay mode (step S104: YES), or if the process of step S105 is ended, the bet number in the current variation game is the prescribed bet number that enables the variation game to be started It is determined whether it matches X (step S106). In addition, when it is at the time of replay operation (step S104: YES), the main control CPU 40a sets the bet number in the previous fluctuation game again in the main control RAM 40c as the bet number in the current fluctuation game. By the way, even if the bet number is set, the main control RAM 40c stores information for specifying whether it is a re-playing operation, so by referring to the information, the main control CPU 40a Can identify whether it is a replaying operation time.

In the present embodiment, the specified bet number X can be said to be the bet number required to play one variation game. In the slot machine 10, the defined bet number X does not differ between the bonus gaming state and the gaming state other than the bonus gaming state, and is the same. However, the defined bet number X may be different between the bonus gaming state and the gaming state other than the bonus gaming state. In this case, the bonus gaming state can be said to be a gaming state in which the defined bet number X is different from the gaming states other than the bonus gaming state. Further, the bonus gaming state can be said to be a gaming state in which the specified bet number X is smaller than the gaming states other than the bonus gaming state. The bonus gaming state may be a gaming state in which the specified bet number X is larger than the gaming state other than the bonus gaming state. As described above, when the prescribed bet number X is made different according to the gaming state, the main control CPU 40a performs the process of step S106 using the prescribed bet number X according to the gaming state.

  If the bet amount does not match the defined bet amount X (step S106: NO), the main control CPU 40a proceeds to the process of step S103. That is, in the process of step S106, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the variation game can be started. On the other hand, when the bet number in the current variation game matches the specified bet number X (step S106: YES), the main control CPU 40a determines whether a start operation by the start lever 20 has been received (step S107). In the process of step S107, the main control CPU 40a makes an affirmative determination when an operation signal is input from the start lever 20, and a negative determination when no operation signal is input from the start lever 20. If the start operation has not been received (step S107: NO), the main control CPU 40a proceeds to the process of step S103. On the other hand, when the start operation has been received (step S107: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs a game number subtraction process (step S108). When the main control CPU 40a receives the start operation, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a change game start command) capable of specifying the start of the change game in the output buffer.

  In the game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a performs a first game number subtraction process and a second game number subtraction process. In the game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a performs a first game number subtraction process, and performs a second game number subtraction process after completing the first game number subtraction process. Then, in the game subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a returns to the game progress main process after finishing the second game number subtraction process.

  In the first game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the rendering state flag stored in the main control RAM 40c, and determines whether the current rendering state is the advantageous rendering state. When it is not in the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the first game number subtraction process. On the other hand, in the case of the advantageous rendering state, the main control CPU 40a subtracts 1 from the remaining number of times of advantageous stay stored in the main control RAM 40c to update it. The remaining number of stay is the number of remaining variable games that can notify the operation mode of the stop button for deriving the bell stop in the advantageous rendering state, and the transition from the advantageous rendering state to the normal rendering state It can be said that it is the number of remaining fluctuation games that can be avoided. Thereafter, the main control CPU 40a ends the first game number subtraction process.

  In the second game number subtraction process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag, and determines whether the current effect state is the advantageous effect state. When it is not in the advantageous rendering state, the main control CPU 40a ends the second game number subtraction process. On the other hand, in the case of the advantageous rendering state, the main control CPU 40a subtracts 1 from the remaining advantageous upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c to update it. The remaining advantageous upper limit value is a value until the end condition of the advantageous period is satisfied, and when the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches 0, the end condition of the advantageous period is satisfied, and it is advantageous at a predetermined timing thereafter. The period ends. Thereafter, the main control CPU 40a ends the second game number subtraction process.

When the game number subtraction process is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs a combination lottery process for determining a winning number as a combination lottery (step S109). In the role lottery process, the main control CPU 40a acquires the value of the role lottery random number. Further, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the gaming state flag stored in the main control RAM 40c, and specifies the current gaming state.
Then, the main control CPU 40a selects a combination lottery table corresponding to the specified gaming state. Then, the main control CPU 40a performs the role lottery by referring to the selected role lottery table on the basis of the acquired value for the role lottery random number. Specifically, the main control CPU 40a determines a winning number to which the acquired value for the winning combination random number is assigned. In addition, when the value of the role lottery random number is not distributed to the winning number permitting the winning of the symbol combination for which the prize is determined, the lottery result of the role lottery is “off”. In the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs the role lottery process, whereby the function as the role lottery means for performing the role lottery is realized.

  In addition, when a bonus flag capable of specifying that a bonus combination is permitted to be won is not set, the main control CPU 40a in the combination lottery process wins a winning number that permits a bonus combination to be won, the bonus Set a bonus flag corresponding to the type of role. The bonus flag includes a first bonus flag which is set when a winning number permitting the winning of the first bonus combination is won, and a number set when the winning number permitting the winning of the second bonus combination is won. There are 2 bonus flags and a single bonus flag set when winning is made to a winning number which permits winning of a single bonus combination. On the other hand, when the bonus flag is already set (when the winning of the specific bonus combination is carried over), the main control CPU 40a newly wins the bonus flag when it wins the winning number allowing the winning of the bonus combination. Not set to

  Further, in the role lottery process, the main control CPU 40a stores information (hereinafter referred to as winning information) which can specify the lottery result of the role lottery in the main control RAM 40c. Further, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter, referred to as a win information command) capable of specifying the lottery result of the part lottery in the output buffer. In addition, after storing the winning information command in the output buffer, the main control CPU 40a ends the role lottery process and returns to the game progress main process.

  When the combination lottery process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs an advantageous lottery process (step S110). In the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a performs an advantageous transition lottery process, a ceiling determination process, and an additional lottery process. In the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a performs an advantageous transition lottery process, and performs a ceiling determination process after completing the advantageous transition lottery process. Furthermore, in the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a performs the additional lottery process after the ceiling determination process is finished. Then, in the advantageous lottery process, the main control CPU 40a returns to the game progress main process after finishing the additional lottery process.

In the advantageous transfer lottery process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag, and determines whether the current effect state is the normal effect state. When it is not the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the advantageous transition lottery process. On the other hand, when in the normal rendering state, the main control CPU 40a stores information (hereinafter referred to as advantageous transition allowance information) capable of specifying that transition to the advantageous rendering state is permitted in the main control RAM 40c. Determine if it is. Then, when the advantageous shift allowance information is stored in the main control RAM 40c, the main control CPU 40a ends the advantageous shift lottery process. On the other hand, when the advantageous transfer allowance information is not stored in the main control RAM 40c, the main control CPU 40a performs the advantageous transfer lottery based on the lottery result of the part lottery. For example, the main control CPU 40a according to the present embodiment acquires the value of the random number generated in the main substrate 40, and refers to the predetermined lottery table based on the acquired value of the random number, and acquires the acquired random number. In accordance with the value of, the transition to the advantageous rendering state is permitted, or the advantageous transition lottery to decide not to permit the transition to the advantageous rendering state is performed. The probability that it is determined to allow the transition to the advantageous rendering state in the advantageous transition lottery differs depending on the lottery result of the winning lot. When it is not determined to allow the transition to the advantageous effect state in the advantageous transition lottery, the main control CPU 40a ends the advantageous transition lottery process. On the other hand, when it is determined in the advantageous transition lottery that transition to the advantageous effect state is permitted, the main control CPU 40a stores the advantageous transition allowance information in the main control RAM 40c. Furthermore, the main control CPU 40
a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an “advantage allowance command”) capable of specifying that the transition to the advantageous rendering state has been determined in the output buffer, and ends the advantageous transition lottery process.

  In the ceiling determination process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag, and determines whether the current effect state is the normal effect state. When it is not the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a ends the ceiling determination process. On the other hand, in the case of the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a adds 1 to the number of normal executions stored in the main control RAM 40c to update the number of normal executions. The number of times of normal execution corresponds to the number of fluctuation games executed in the normal effect state without being controlled to the advantageous effect state or the bonus effect state. Further, the main control CPU 40a determines whether the number of normal executions after the update has reached the number of ceilings stored in the main control RAM 40c. If the number of times of normal execution has not reached the number of ceilings, the main control CPU 40a ends the ceiling determination process. On the other hand, when the number of times of normal execution has reached the number of ceilings, the main control CPU 40a stores the advantageous shift allowance information in the main control RAM 40c. Furthermore, the main control CPU 40a stores the advantageous tolerance command in the output buffer, and ends the ceiling determination process.

  In the additional lottery process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag, and determines whether the current effect state is the advantageous effect state. When it is not in the advantageous rendering state, the main control CPU 40a ends the additional lottery process. On the other hand, in the case of the advantageous effect state, the main control CPU 40a performs the additional lottery based on the lottery result of the part lottery. For example, the main control CPU 40a according to the present embodiment acquires the value of the random number generated in the main substrate 40, and refers to the predetermined lottery table based on the acquired value of the random number, and acquires the acquired random number. In accordance with the value of, perform an addition lottery to decide to add or not to add.

  Further, in the present embodiment, when it is determined to add, the number of times to add (so-called, the number of additions) is also determined. Here, "adding" is to increase the number of remaining stay times, and increase the remaining number of variation games that can notify the operation mode of the stop button for deriving the bell stop in the advantageous rendering state. In other words, it is equivalent to extending the period controlled to the advantageous rendering state. The “number of additions” corresponds to the number of times to increase the number of remaining advantageous stays, that is, the number added to the number of remaining advantageous stays. However, when the remaining number of remaining stays stored in the main control RAM 40c exceeds the remaining upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c, the main control CPU 40a performs the additional drawing lottery in the additional drawing process. And the additional lottery process is ended. Incidentally, in the present embodiment, when in the second advantageous rendering state, it is easy to determine that the additional lottery is performed in comparison with the first advantageous rendering state. That is, in the second advantageous rendering state, there are many opportunities to be added as compared with the first advantageous rendering state, and it can be said to be advantageous. In the present embodiment, the first advantageous rendering state corresponds to the first specific state, and the second advantageous rendering state corresponds to the second specific state. And, in the present embodiment, the second specific state is advantageous over the first specific state.

  When it is determined to add in the additional drawing, the main control CPU 40a adds the determined number of additions to the remaining number of advantageous stays stored in the main control RAM 40c, and updates the remaining number of advantageous stays. Further, when the main control CPU 40a decides to add, that is, when it determines the number of additions, it stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an addition number command) capable of specifying the number of additions in the output buffer. End the lottery process.

When the advantageous lottery process is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs an instruction information determination process (step S111). In the instruction information determination process, when the main control CPU 40a is in a preparation effect state and wins a winning number allowing the promotion of the re-playing game combination in the role lottery, it corresponds to the operation order for winning the promotion re-playing game combination. Decide which instruction information to use. Further, in the instruction information determination process, when the main control CPU 40a is in the advantageous effect state and is won by the winning number permitting the combination of the bell combination and the single combination combination in the combination lottery, an operation order for winning the bell combination Determine the corresponding instruction number. Further, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an instruction information command) capable of specifying the determined instruction information in the output buffer, ends the instruction information determination process, and returns to the game progress main process. The instruction information displayed by the payout display unit 37 in the present embodiment includes instruction information corresponding to each of the first to sixth pressing order operation orders (pushing order). In the instruction information determination process, the main control CPU 40a refers to the value of the effect state flag to specify the current effect state.

  When the instruction information determination process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs an instruction information display process (step S112). When the instruction information is determined in the instruction information determination process, the main control CPU 40a controls the payout display unit 37 so that the determined instruction information is displayed. When the instruction information is not determined in the instruction information determination process, the main control CPU 40a ends the instruction information display process and returns to the game progress main process.

  When the instruction information display process is completed, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the wait time (minimum game time) has elapsed (step S113). When the wait time has not elapsed (step S113: NO), the main control CPU 40a waits until the wait time elapses. If the wait time has elapsed (step S113: YES), the main control CPU 40a controls the actuators of the reels 13a to 13c so that the rotation of the reels 13a to 13c is started (step S114). In the slot machine 10, the rotation of the reels 13a to 13c is started in step S114, and the variation game (game) is started. As described above, in the present embodiment, it is possible to perform the change game after the determination result in step S106 in the game progress main process becomes affirmative. That is, in the slot machine 10, the fluctuation game (game) can be performed on condition that the bet number is set. In the process of step S114, the main control CPU 40a stands by until the rotational speed of the reels 13a to 13c becomes constant at a predetermined rotational speed and the stop operation by the stop buttons 21a to 21c can be received. When the rotational speed of the reels 13a to 13c becomes constant at a predetermined rotational speed, the main control CPU 40a determines control information (hereinafter referred to as a stop acceptance command) that can specify that the stop operation can be received. Store in output buffer.

  Next, the main control CPU 40a determines whether a stop operation by any of the stop buttons 21a to 21c has been received (step S115). In the process of step S115, the main control CPU 40a makes an affirmative determination when a detection signal is input from any of the stop buttons 21a to 21c, while inputting a detection signal from any of the stop buttons 21a to 21c. If not, the determination is negative. If the stop operation has not been received (step S115: NO), the main control CPU 40a waits until the stop operation is received.

On the other hand, when the stop operation has been received (step S115: YES), the main control CPU 40a executes a reel stop process to stop the rotation of the reel corresponding to the stop button to which the detection signal is input (step S116). That is, the main control CPU 40a controls the actuator in response to the stop operation, and stops the symbol on the reel corresponding to the stop operation. Explaining in detail, the main control CPU 40a draws in a predetermined drawing range (for example, 4 symbols) based on the lottery result of the part lottery and the operation mode (operation order and operation position (operation timing)) of the stop buttons 21a to 21c. The symbol which can be stopped on the effective line YL is searched from the symbols located in). And main control CPU40a controls an actuator so that the searched pattern is stopped on effective line YL. The main control CPU 40a stops the symbol combination according to the winning number and the operation mode of the stop button on the effective line YL by performing such reel stop control with respect to the stop operation of the reels 13a to 13c. For example, the main control CPU 40a does not receive the lottery result of the part lottery, and
When the bonus flag is set, when the stop buttons 21a to 21c are operated at the stop operation position where it is possible to derive the first bonus stop, the reels 13a to so that the first bonus combination is won. Stop 13c. In the process of step S116, when the detection signal is input from the stop buttons 21a to 21c, the main control CPU 40a outputs control information (hereinafter referred to as an operation command) that can specify the stop button to which the detection signal is input. Store in buffer

  Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a determines whether all the reels 13a to 13c have been stopped (step S117). When some of the reels 13a to 13c are not stopped (step S117: NO), the main control CPU 40a proceeds to the process of step S115. On the other hand, when all the reels 13a to 13c have been stopped (step S117: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs an addition stagnation process (step S118).

  In the addition stagnation processing, the main control CPU 40a determines whether it is determined to be added in the addition lottery processing in the advantageous lottery processing in step S110. When it is not determined to add, the main control CPU 40a ends the addition stagnation processing and returns to the game progress main processing. On the other hand, when it is determined to perform the addition, the main control CPU 40a performs the addition freeze control, terminates the addition stagnation processing after the end of the addition freeze control, and returns to the game progress main processing. In the addition freeze control, the main control CPU 40a measures the addition freeze time. When performing the additional freeze control, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter, referred to as an additional freeze start command) capable of specifying that the additional freeze control is to be started in an output buffer. In addition, in the addition freeze control, the main control CPU 40a stands by until the addition freeze time elapses. Then, when the addition freeze time has elapsed, the main control CPU 40a ends the addition freeze control. When finishing the addition freeze control, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an addition freeze end command) capable of specifying that the addition freeze control has ended in the output buffer.

  When the addition stagnation control is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs display symbol determination processing to determine symbol combinations stopped on the effective line YL (step S119). In the display symbol determination process, the main control CPU 40a stops whether the symbol combination (combination) for which the award is determined on the effective line YL is stopped and the symbol combination (combination) for which the award is defined on the effective line YL is stopped. If yes, determine the type of symbol combination. When the symbol combination for which a prize is determined is stopped, that is, when the combination is won, the main control CPU 40a outputs control information (hereinafter referred to as a prize command) capable of specifying the combination that has won the combination. Store in Further, in step S119, when the symbol combination for which the re-game is determined as a prize is stopped on the activated line YL, the main control CPU 40a sets the bet number betted in the current variation game as the bet number again. To activate the replay (when the replay is activated). Thereby, the re-game is to be awarded as a prize.

  Further, in the process of step S119, when the main control CPU 40a determines that the first bonus combination is won in the advantageous effect state, the remaining upper limit of advantage stored in the main control RAM 40c is "118". Subtract and update the remaining upper limit of advantage. Further, in the process of step S119, when the main control CPU 40a determines that the second bonus combination has won, the main control CPU 40a determines "43" from the remaining upper limit of advantage stored in the main control RAM 40c. Subtract and update the remaining upper limit of advantage. If the value to be subtracted (118 or 43) is larger than the remaining advantageous upper limit, that is, if it is less than 0 when subtracted from the remaining advantageous upper limit, the main control CPU 40a determines the remaining advantageous upper limit. Set "0 (zero)" and update the remaining upper limit value of advantage.

  Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a determines whether to pay out the medals to the player (step S120). In the process of step S120, the main control CPU 40a makes a positive determination if the payout combination is won, but makes a negative determination if the payout combination is not. When the medal is dispensed (step S120: YES), the main control CPU 40a executes a medal payout process (step S121). In the medal payout process, the main control CPU 40a increases the credits stored in the main control RAM 40c by the number of medals to be paid out. At this time, when the credit upper limit number (for example, 50) is exceeded, the main control CPU 40a controls the hopper unit HU so that the number of medals exceeding the credit upper limit number is paid out. Further, in the medal payout process, the main control CPU 40a controls the payout display unit 37 such that the number of medals to be paid out due to the occurrence of a winning is displayed. Incidentally, a prize is not awarded when a symbol combination (for example, a missing stop) for which a prize is not determined is stopped on the effective line YL.

  When the main control CPU 40a does not pay out the medals (step S120: NO), and when the medal payout process (step S121) is ended, the main control CPU 40a is an end process for ending one variation game. (Step S122). In the end process, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a change game end command) capable of specifying the end of the change game in the output buffer. The fluctuation game end command can also specify the presence or absence of a winning, and the winning combination.

Further, in the end process, the main control CPU 40a performs a game state transition process and an effect state transition process. First, the game state transition process will be described.
In the gaming state transition process, the main control CPU 40a updates the value of the gaming state flag according to the lottery result of the role lottery, the current gaming state and the symbol combination (for example, the winning combination) derived in the variation game. , Shift the game state. The main control CPU 40a refers to the game state flag to specify the current game state. The main control CPU 40a specifies a winning combination based on the result of the display symbol determination process (step S119). When the value of the gaming state flag is updated, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a gaming state designation command) instructing a gaming state which can be identified from the updated value in the output buffer.

  Specifically, in the gaming state transition processing, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the second gaming state in the gaming state flag, when the promotion replay player combination is won when the first gaming state is in progress. Further, when the single-piece winning combination is won when the second gaming state is set, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first gaming state in the gaming state flag. Further, the main control CPU 40a is a value capable of specifying the carryover gaming state when the first bonus combination has not been won while winning the winning number allowing the first bonus combination to be won in the combination lottery. Set to Further, the main control CPU 40a sets the gaming state flag capable of specifying the carryover gaming state when the second bonus combination does not win while winning the winning number allowing the second bonus combination to be won in the combination lottery. Do. The main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the carryover gaming state when the first bonus flag is set to the gaming state flag, and sets the carryover gaming state when the second bonus flag is set. A identifiable value may be set in the game state flag. Incidentally, the main control CPU 40a cancels the setting of the single bonus flag when the single bonus combination has not won while winning the winning number allowing the single bonus combination to be won in the combination lottery.

When the first bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first bonus gaming state in the gaming state flag. Further, the main control CPU 40a cancels the setting of the first bonus flag. Also, while the value capable of specifying the first bonus gaming state is set in the gaming state flag, that is, while in the first bonus gaming state, the main control CPU 40a is a medal paid out in the first bonus gaming state Count the number of Then, when the number of medals paid out in the first bonus gaming state exceeds 236, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first gaming state in the gaming state flag. Further, when the second bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the second bonus gaming state in the gaming state flag. Further, the main control CPU 40a cancels the setting of the second bonus flag. Also, while the value capable of specifying the second bonus gaming state is set in the gaming state flag, that is, while in the second bonus gaming state, the main control CPU 40a, the medals paid out in the second bonus gaming state Count the number of Then, when the number of medals paid out in the second bonus gaming state exceeds 86, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first gaming state in the gaming state flag. Further, when the single bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the single bonus gaming state in the gaming state flag. Further, the main control CPU 40a cancels the setting of the single bonus flag. In addition, after one fluctuation game is executed in the single bonus gaming state, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first gaming state in the gaming state flag.

Next, the effect state transition process will be described.
In the effect state transition process, the main control CPU 40a updates the value of the effect state flag to shift the effect state. The main control CPU 40a refers to the effect state flag to specify the current effect state.

  In the effect state transition process, when the advantage transfer allowance information is stored in the main control RAM 40c in the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a sets the precursor frequency in the main control RAM 40c. For example, as the precursor number, the number of times such as 8 times, 12 times, 32 times, etc. is set. When the precursor number is 1 or more, the main control CPU 40a subtracts 1 from the precursor number and updates the precursor number. In addition, when the precursor count after updating reaches 0, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the preparation effect state in the effect state flag. As described above, in the case where the advantageous shift allowance information is stored and the number of precursors reaches 0, the advantageous allowance condition is satisfied.

  In the preparation effect state, the main control CPU 40a sets, in the effect state flag, a value capable of specifying the first advantageous effect state when the promotion replay player combination wins. At this time, the main control CPU 40a stores "30 times" in the main control RAM 40c as the remaining number of advantageous stays. In the transition from the preparation effect state to the first advantageous effect state, the remaining number of advantageous stays stored in the main control RAM 40c may not be the predetermined number, for example, the number determined by lottery It may be As described above, when the promotion player role has won in the preparation effect state, an advantage start condition is established.

When the main control CPU 40a wins a predetermined winning number (for example, a winning number permitting a cherry combination) in the first advantageous rendering state in the first advantageous rendering state, a second determining whether to shift to the second advantageous rendering state Make a favorable transition lottery. For example, the main control CPU 40a according to the present embodiment acquires the value of the random number generated in the main substrate 40, and refers to the predetermined lottery table based on the acquired value of the random number, and acquires the acquired random number. The second advantageous transition lottery is performed to determine not to shift to the second advantageous rendering state or to shift to the second advantageous rendering state according to the value of. The probability that it is determined to shift to the second advantageous rendering state in the second advantageous transition lottery varies depending on the lottery result of the combination lottery. When it is determined to shift to the second advantageous rendering state in the second advantageous transition lottery, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the second advantageous rendering state in the rendering state flag. When a value capable of specifying the second advantageous rendering state is set as the rendering state flag, the main control CPU 40a sets “the second advantageous staying number corresponding to the number of remaining variation games controlled to the second advantageous rendering state”. "10 times" is stored in the main control RAM 40c. On the other hand, when it is not determined to shift to the second advantageous rendering state in the second advantageous transition lottery, the main control CPU 40a does not set a value capable of specifying the second advantageous rendering state in the rendering state flag. As described above, when it is determined to shift to the second advantageous rendering state in the second advantageous transition lottery in the first advantageous rendering state, the advantageous promotion condition is established.

  In the second advantageous rendering state, the main control CPU 40a subtracts one from the second advantageous stay number stored in the main control RAM 40c every time the variable game is played, and updates the second advantageous stay number. Then, when the second advantageous stay number reaches 0, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first advantageous rendering state in the rendering state flag in the rendering state transition process. Thus, when the second advantageous stay number reaches 0 in the second advantageous rendering state, the preferential demotion condition is satisfied.

  In the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state, when the remaining advantageous upper limit value stored in the main control RAM 40c becomes a value smaller than "100", the main control CPU 40a determines the special advantageous rendering state. A specifiable value is set in the effect state flag. As described above, the special advantageous condition is satisfied when the remaining advantageous upper limit reaches "100" in the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state.

  In the advantageous rendering state, when the remaining advantageous upper limit reaches "0", the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the normal rendering state as a rendering state flag. Thus, in the advantageous rendering state, when the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches "0", the advantageous termination condition is satisfied. Further, in the advantageous rendering state, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the normal rendering state as a rendering state flag, when the remaining number of advantageous stays reaches “0”. As described above, when the remaining number of stays in the advantageous rendering state reaches "0", the advantageous ending condition is satisfied. As described above, in the advantageous ending condition, the advantageous ending condition which is satisfied when the remaining advantageous upper limit value reaches "0" in the advantageous rendering state, and the remaining advantageous staying number is "0" in the advantageous rendering state. There is an advantageous termination condition that is met when it is reached.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as the termination condition of the advantageous rendering state, the termination condition that is satisfied when the number of times of the advantageous stay is “0” without the advantageous upper limit becoming less than “100”, and the advantageous upper limit There is a termination condition that is satisfied when the value is less than 100 "and the advantageous upper limit value is" 0 "or the number of favorable stays is" 0 ". In the present embodiment, the termination condition that is satisfied when the number of times of advantageous stay is “0” without the advantageous upper limit value being less than “100” corresponds to the first termination condition. Further, in the present embodiment, the termination condition satisfied when the advantageous upper limit becomes less than “100” and the advantageous upper limit becomes “0” or the number of favorable stays becomes “0” is the second termination. It corresponds to the condition. As described above, in the present embodiment, the termination condition of the advantageous rendering state corresponding to the specific state includes the first termination condition and the second termination condition. Incidentally, the case where the first end condition is satisfied in the slot machine 10 corresponds to the case where the end condition of the advantageous effect state is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state. Further, the case where the second end condition is satisfied in the slot machine 10 corresponds to the case where the end condition of the advantageous effect state is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state.

The main control CPU 40a determines the internal mode when the value of the effect state flag is updated to a value that can specify the normal effect state. Based on the type of internal mode before transition, the main control CPU 40a determines an internal mode after transition (internal mode of transition destination). The main control CPU 40a specifies the type of internal mode before transition from the value of the internal mode flag stored in the main control RAM 40c. Then, for example, as shown in FIG. 8B, when the internal mode before transition is the first internal mode, the main control CPU 40a has the probability of 85% and the first internal mode with a probability of 13%. 2) With the probability of 2%, determine the third internal mode as the internal mode after transition. Further, after determining the internal mode after transition, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the determined internal mode after transition in the internal mode flag. Further, after determining the internal mode after transition, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as an internal mode command) capable of specifying the internal mode in the output buffer. In the present embodiment, the value of the internal mode flag is updated by the main control CPU 40a to control the internal mode as the internal control state, thereby realizing the function as internal control state means for controlling the internal control state. .

  When the main control CPU 40a updates the value of the effect state flag to a value that can identify the normal effect state, the main control CPU 40a determines the number of ceilings. The main control CPU 40a determines the number of ceilings based on the type of internal mode after transition. After determining the range of the number of times of determination as the number of ceilings, the main control CPU 40a determines the number of ceilings from the number of times within the range. For example, as shown in FIG. 8A, when the internal mode after transition is the third internal mode, the main control CPU 40a has a probability of 40% and a range of “1 to 70” and a probability of 60%. The range of the number of times of determining the range of “71 to 128” as the number of ceilings is determined. At this time, for example, when the range of “71 to 128” is determined, the main control CPU 40a determines the number of ceilings with an equal probability or a substantially equal probability from within the range of “71 to 128”. Further, after determining the number of ceilings, the main control CPU 40a updates the number of ceilings stored in the main control RAM 40c.

  When the specific bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the bonus effect state in the effect state flag in the effect state transition process. Specifically, when the first bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first bonus effect state in the effect state flag. Further, when the second bonus combination is won, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the second bonus effect state in the effect state flag.

  When the termination condition of the specific bonus gaming state is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a in principle sets a value capable of specifying the rendering state before transitioning to the bonus rendering state in the rendering state flag in the rendering state transition process. Specifically, when the termination condition of the first bonus gaming state is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the rendering state before shifting to the first bonus rendering state in the rendering state flag. Further, when the termination condition of the second bonus gaming state is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the rendering state before shifting to the second bonus rendering state in the rendering state flag. However, when the termination condition of the specific bonus gaming state is satisfied, if the remaining advantageous upper limit is a value larger than “0” and smaller than “100”, the effect state before transition to the bonus effect state is the first Even in the advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the special advantageous rendering state in the rendering state flag. Furthermore, when the termination condition of the specific bonus gaming state is satisfied, when the remaining upper limit of advantage reaches “0”, even if the rendering state before transition to the bonus rendering state is the advantageous rendering state, the main The control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the normal effect state as the effect state flag. In this case, the main control CPU 40a determines the internal mode after transition and the number of ceilings. Then, the main control CPU 40a updates the "value of internal mode flag" and the "number of ceilings" stored in the main control RAM 40c.

  As shown in FIG. 11, when the termination process is completed, the main control CPU 40a performs a special stagnation process (step S123). The specific control in the special stagnation process will be described later. Then, when the process of step S123 is ended, the main control CPU 40a ends the game progress main process related to the execution of one fluctuation game, and returns to the process of step S101 again. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the rotation of all the reels is started in response to the start operation, and the rotation of the reels is stopped in response to the stop operation.

In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a may perform the settlement process separately from the game progress main process. The main control CPU 40 a performs the settlement process when the detection signal from the settlement button 19 is input. Note that the main control CPU 40a does not perform the settlement process even if the detection signal from the settlement button 19 is input within the period in which the processes of step S108 to step S123 are performed in the game progression main process. That is, a period in which the settlement process can be performed (hereinafter referred to as a settlement processable period) is within a period in which the main control CPU 40a is performing the processing of step S101 to step S107 in the game progression main processing. As described above, in the present embodiment, the settlement process corresponding to the settlement control is performed on the condition that the settlement button 19 as the settlement operation means is operated.

  When the credit is 1 or more (that is, when there is a credit) in the settlement process available period, the main control CPU 40a performs the settlement process when the detection signal from the settlement button 19 is input. In addition, the main control CPU 40a inputs a detection signal from the settlement button 19 when the number of bets is 1 or more even when the credit is 0 (that is, when there is no credit) in the settlement processable period. The settlement process is performed at the opportunity of doing. However, when the bet number mentioned here is 1 or more, it is premised that the bet number is not set by the re-play. If the credit is 1 or more even when the re-game is awarded and the bet number is 1 or more, the main control CPU 40a is triggered by the input of the detection signal from the settlement button 19. Perform settlement processing.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, if the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 1 or more within the settlement processable period, the settlement process is performed. In addition, in the slot machine 10, if the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 0 within the settlement possible period, if the settlement button 19 is operated, the settlement processing is performed. Further, in the slot machine 10, if the credit is 0 and the bet number is 1 or more in the settlement possible period, if the settlement button 19 is operated, the settlement processing is performed. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10, if the credit is 0 and the bet number is 0 even within the settlement processable period, the settlement process is not performed even if the settlement button 19 is operated.

  In the settlement process, when the credit stored in the main control RAM 40c is 1 or more, the main control CPU 40a controls the hopper unit HU to pay out (settle) the number of medals stored as the credit. Do. Further, in the settlement process, the main control CPU 40a pays out (settles) the number of medals set as the number of bets when the number of bets is 1 or more, not at the time of replay operation, and the hopper unit HU Control. However, in the case of replay operation, the main control CPU 40a does not control the hopper unit HU so as to pay out the number of medals set as the bet number, and if the credit is one or more, the credits The hopper unit HU is controlled so that only the stored number of medals is paid out. As described above, at the time of replay operation, the settlement of the number of medals set as the bet number is not performed. Further, when performing the settlement process, the main control CPU 40a stores control information (hereinafter referred to as a settlement command) that can specify that the settlement process is performed in the output buffer. The settlement process in the present embodiment corresponds to settlement control. Then, in the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs the settlement process to realize a function as a settlement control unit that performs the settlement control.

Next, processing executed by the sub control CPU 41a of the sub board 41 will be described.
When the setting value command is input, the sub control CPU 41a specifies a setting value that can be specified from the setting value command. Then, the sub control CPU 41a stores, in the sub control RAM 41c, setting value information that can specify the specified setting value.

  The sub control CPU 41a updates the game state information stored in the sub control RAM 41c when the game state command is input. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a updates the game state information indicating the game state which can be specified from the game state command. The gaming state indicated by the gaming state information corresponds to the gaming state which can be identified from the gaming state information.

  When the rendering control command is input, the sub control CPU 41a updates the rendering status information stored in the sub control RAM 41c. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a updates effect state information indicating an effect state that can be identified from the effect state command. The effect state indicated by the effect state information corresponds to an effect state that can be identified from the effect state information.

  When the bet number setting command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect state that can be identified from the effect state information. Incidentally, after the re-playing part has won a prize, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect state that can be identified from the effect state information when the variable game start command is input. Specifically, when the type of effect state that can be identified is changed from the effect state information, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect state after the change. On the other hand, when the type of effect state that can be identified is not changed from the effect state information, the sub control CPU 41a continues to control the effect state under control. For example, when the effect state that can be identified from the effect state information is changed to the normal effect state, the sub control CPU 41a normally controls the effect display device 14 so that the background image in the normal effect state is displayed. Control to the production state. In addition, the sub control CPU 41a controls the decoration lamp 15 to emit light of the light emission color in the normal effect state, or controls the speaker 16 to output background music in the normal effect state. Control to the production state. In the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a performs control to cause the effect display device 14 to display a background image in the effect state that can be identified from the effect state information, whereby the effect state as the effect mode is controlled. A function as effect mode control means to control is realized.

  The sub control CPU 41a counts the number (number of medals) of medals that have increased before the start of the first bonus game state until the end of the first bonus game state, and is stored in the sub control RAM 41c as acquisition information during the first bonus. Remember. In the first bonus gaming state, the sub control CPU 41a specifies the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning command, adds the specified number to the value that can be specified from the first bonus in-progress information, and 1) Update bonus acquisition information. Also, in the first bonus gaming state, when the sub control CPU 41a inputs a bet number setting command, the bet number specified from the bet number setting command can be specified from the value that can be specified from the first bonus in-progress information Subtract and update the first bonus middle earned information. In addition, after the end of the first bonus gaming state, the sub control CPU 41a initializes the first bonus in-progress information at the input of the change game start command (the execution of the next change game). .

  The sub control CPU 41a counts the number (number of medals) of medals that have increased before the start of the second bonus game state until the end of the second bonus game state, and is stored in the sub control RAM 41c as acquisition information during the second bonus. Remember. When in the second bonus gaming state, the sub control CPU 41a specifies the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning command, adds the specified number to the value that can be specified from the second bonus acquisition information, and 2 Update bonus acquisition information. Also, in the second bonus gaming state, when the secondary control CPU 41a inputs a bet number setting command, the bet number specified from the bet number setting command can be specified from the value which can be specified from the second bonus in-progress information Subtract and update the second bonus in-progress information. The secondary control CPU 41a initializes the second bonus in-progress information upon the input of a change game start command (after the next change game is executed) after the end of the second bonus game state. .

The sub control CPU 41a counts the number (the number of medals) of medals acquired after the start of the advantageous period, and stores the number as the advantageous period acquisition information in the sub control RAM 41c. In the case of the advantageous period, that is, in the case of the bonus gaming state (bonus effect state) or the advantageous effect state, the sub control CPU 41a specifies the number of medals to be paid out based on the winning command, and the specified number is advantageous. The advantageous period acquisition information is updated by adding to the value that can be specified from the period acquisition information. In addition, when it is the advantageous period, when the bet number setting command is input, the sub control CPU 41a subtracts the bet number specified from the bet number setting command from the value that can be specified from the advantageous period acquisition information, and the advantageous period Update acquisition information. In addition, after the advantageous period ends and the secondary effect control CPU 41a is controlled to the normal effect state, the advantageous period acquisition information is triggered by the input of the fluctuation game start command (the next fluctuation game is executed). Initialize

  Incidentally, when it is possible to specify the winning of the re-playing part from the winning command, the sub control CPU 41a does not update the advantageous period acquisition information. In addition, even in the case where the replay player is able to win a prize when it is in the first bonus gaming state, the secondary control CPU 41a is in the first bonus when the win of the replay player can be specified from the win command. Do not update acquired information. Similarly, even in the case where the replay player is able to win a prize when in the second bonus gaming state, when it is possible to specify the win of the replay player from the win command, the sub control CPU 41a generates the second bonus. Do not update middle acquisition information.

  When the sub control CPU 41a receives an internal mode command, the sub control CPU 41a updates the internal mode information stored in the sub control RAM 41c. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a updates the internal mode information indicating an internal mode that can be identified from the internal mode command. The internal mode indicated by the internal mode information corresponds to an internal mode that can be identified from the internal mode information.

  When the instruction information command is input, the sub control CPU 41a performs navigation effect processing in which navigation effect is executed. The sub control CPU 41a performs navigation effect processing based on the win number which can be identified from the win information command and the instruction information which can be identified from the instruction information command. In the navigation effect process, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that navigation effect to notify the operation mode of the stop button based on the instruction information that can be specified from the instruction information command is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 12A, the navi effect includes navi effects in which normal navigation images Na1 to Na3 are displayed on the effect display device 14. For example, when the instruction information that can be identified from the instruction information command is instruction information corresponding to the fourth pressing order, the sub control CPU 41a displays the effect display device 14 so that the navigation effect of notifying the fourth pressing order is executed. Control. Specifically, the sub control CPU 41a is a normal navigation image Na1 having "1" in the display region corresponding to the middle reel 13b, a normal navigation image Na2 having "2" in the display region corresponding to the right reel 13c, and the left reel The effect display device 14 is controlled such that the normal navigation image Na3 having "3" is displayed in the display area corresponding to 13a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 12B, the navigation effect includes a bell navigation effect in which bell navigation images Nb1 to Nb3 different from the normal navigation images Na1 to Na3 are displayed on the effect display device 14. The bell navigation effect is a navigation effect executed only when the bell combination is accepted. For example, when the instruction information that can be identified from the instruction information command is the instruction information corresponding to the fourth push order, and it is possible to specify that the winning number allows the winning of the bell combination from the winning information command. The sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the bell navigation effect of notifying the fourth pressing order is performed. Specifically, the sub control CPU 41a uses the bell navigation image Nb1 having "1" in the display region corresponding to the middle reel 13b, the bell navigation image Nb2 having "2" in the display region corresponding to the right reel 13c, and the left reel 13a. The effect display device 14 is controlled such that the bell navigation image Nb3 having "3" is displayed in the corresponding display area.

The sub control CPU 41a may execute an additional suggestion effect that suggests that the additional effect is to be performed when the advantageous effect state is generated. The additional suggestion effect is executed by the movement of the star movable body 26. The additional suggestion effect is executed when the execution of the additional suggestion effect is determined in the execution lottery of the additional suggestion effect performed when the advantageous effect state is generated. The sub control CPU 41a, after entering the stop acceptance command when in the advantageous rendering state, performs an execution lottery for the additional suggestion effect. When the additional control number command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the execution of the additional suggestion effect with high probability as compared with the case where the additional number command is not input. For this reason, when the star movable body 26 operates, the sense of expectation for the addition is increased. When it is determined to execute the additional suggestion effect, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the second actuator A2, operates the star movable body 26, and executes the additional suggestion effect.

  The sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the additional effect is executed when the additional freeze start command is input. In the additional effect, the sub control CPU 41a specifies the additional number from the additional number command, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the additional effect of notifying the additional number is executed.

  When the settlement control command is input, the sub control CPU 41a performs a settlement effect execution process for executing a settlement effect relating to the settlement of medals (game media). In the settlement effect execution process, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that a settlement effect image SG indicating that the medals are to be settled is displayed.

  As shown in FIG. 13 (a), the settlement effect image SG is an image including characters of “settlement in progress” (character information). That is, the settlement effect is the content for displaying the character "during settlement" (character image). The sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the adjustment effect image SG is displayed over the execution time (for example, 5 seconds) of the adjustment effect. As described above, the settlement effect in the present embodiment is executed by displaying the settlement effect image SG on the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, the effect display device 14 corresponds to effect executing means for executing a settlement effect relating to the settlement of game media. In addition, in the settlement effect execution process, the sub control CPU 41a may be configured to control the decoration lamp 15 so as to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to the settlement effect. In addition, in the settlement effect execution process, the sub control CPU 41a may be configured to control the speaker 16 so that a sound effect corresponding to the settlement effect is output. In this case, it can be said that the decoration lamp 15 and the speaker 16 also correspond to effect executing means in which the settlement effect relating to the settlement of the game medium is executed.

  After the end of the settlement effect execution process, the sub control CPU 41a performs a return notice process for executing a notice on the return of the storage medium. In the return alerting process, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alerting image GTx is displayed.

  As shown in Fig. 13 (b), "Be careful to forget to take the prepaid card. ] Is an image including characters (character information). In other words, please be aware that you have forgotten to take prepaid cards when calling attention to the return of storage media. The content of the character (character information) is displayed. The sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alerting image GTx is displayed over the execution time (for example, 5 seconds) of alerting regarding the return of the storage medium. As described above, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed by displaying the alert image GTx on the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, the effect display device 14 corresponds to an effect execution unit that executes a warning regarding the return of the storage medium. In the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 as the effect execution means to realize the function as the effect control means.

In the return warning calling process, the sub control CPU 41a may be configured to control the decoration lamp 15 so as to emit light in a light emission mode corresponding to a warning regarding the return of the storage medium. In addition, in the return warning calling process, the sub control CPU 41a may be configured to control the speaker 16 so that the sound effect corresponding to the warning regarding the return of the storage medium is output. In this case, it can be said that the decoration lamp 15 and the speaker 16 also correspond to effect executing means for which a warning regarding return of the storage medium is executed. Moreover, in this case, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14, the decoration lamp 15, and the speaker 16 as effect execution means, whereby the function as effect control means is realized.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by the operation of the settlement button 19, after the settlement effect relating to the return of the game medium is executed, the alert on the return of the storage medium is executed. In other words, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the settlement effect on the return of the game medium is executed before the alert on the return of the storage medium is performed. .

  After the end of the return attention calling process, the sub control CPU 41a performs a standby effect execution process for executing the standby effect. However, when the re-game is given, the sub control CPU 41a does not perform the standby effect execution process even after the end of the return attention calling process. That is, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the sub control CPU 41a performs the standby effect execution process when the replay is not given, while the subplay is performed when the replay is given. The control CPU 41a does not perform the standby effect execution process. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the standby effect is not executed after the replay player has won the prize, that is, at the time of replay operation. The specific content of the standby effect will be described later.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, the waiting effect is performed after the settlement effect relating to the return of the game medium is performed. In addition, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, after the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed, the standby effect is performed. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, after the settlement effect relating to the return of the game medium is executed, and the alerting relating to the return of the storage medium is performed After being done, the waiting effect is executed. That is, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement process is performed by operating the settlement button 19, it is after the settlement effect relating to the return of the game medium is executed and before the standby effect is performed. In addition, a warning regarding return of the storage medium is executed.

  As described above, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 1 or more in the slot machine 10 within the settlement processable period. . Further, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 0. Further, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 0 and the bet number is 1 or more. That is, the settlement process is executed when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is one or more, and when the settlement button 19 is operated when the bet number is one or more. However, the settlement process is not performed when the credit is 0 and the replay role is awarded and the bet number is 1 or more.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 14, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more, it can be said that the execution start condition of the standby effect is satisfied. However, since the standby effect execution process is not performed when the replay is given, in the slot machine 10, the replay is performed even when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more. When it is assigned, the execution start condition of the standby effect is not satisfied, and the standby effect is not executed.

Further, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement button 19 is operated when the bet number is one or more, it can be said that the execution start condition of the standby effect is satisfied. However, since the standby effect execution process is not performed when the replay is given, in the slot machine 10, the replay is performed even if the settlement button 19 is operated when the bet number is 1 or more. When is given, the execution start condition of the standby effect is not satisfied, and the standby effect is not executed.

  Further, as described above, when the credit is 0 and the bet number is 0, the settlement process is not performed even if the settlement button 19 is operated. For this reason, when the credit is 0 and the bet number is 0, even if the settlement button 19 is operated, the standby effect is not executed triggered by the operation of the settlement button 19. As described above, in this embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated when the credit is 0 and the bet number is 0, the effect executing means is triggered by the operation of the settlement operation means. As a standby effect is not performed.

  In addition, in the slot machine 10, when the waiting time elapses without the measurement being reset after the start of the measurement of the waiting time, the execution start condition of the waiting effect may be satisfied. However, even in this case, when the replay is given, the execution start condition of the standby effect is not satisfied, and the standby effect is not executed.

  Specifically, when the variable game end command is input, the sub control CPU 41a starts measuring the standby time (for example, 45 seconds). If the standby time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the standby time, the sub control CPU 41a performs a standby effect execution process. In the standby effect execution process, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that a logo effect, various types of reminders, and a character effect, which will be described later, are executed. Note that logo effects, various types of reminders, and character effects executed during the execution of the standby effects will be described later. Further, in the standby effect execution process, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control to make it difficult to visually recognize the reels 13a to 13c. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub control CPU 41a controls the backlight BL so that the backlight BL is turned off. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that an image of one color is displayed in at least the transmissive region 14a of the effect display device 14. As described above, in the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a executes the special visual recognition control to realize the function as the special visual recognition control unit that executes the special visual recognition control.

  However, when the re-game is given, even if the standby time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a does not perform the standby effect execution process. When the sub control CPU 41a inputs a detection signal from the menu button MB while measuring the standby time, it stops measuring the standby time. If the detection signal from the menu button MB is input after stopping the measurement of the standby time, the sub control CPU 41a starts the measurement of the standby time. Thus, in the present embodiment, the measurement of the waiting time is reset by the operation of the menu button MB. Further, when the bet number command is input while measuring the standby time, the sub control CPU 41a stops measuring the standby time.

  As described above, the execution start condition of the standby effect in the slot machine 10 is the condition established when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more, and the settlement button 19 is operated when the bet number is 1 or more. There are a condition that is satisfied in the case, and a condition that is satisfied when the waiting time has elapsed without the measurement being reset after the measurement of the waiting time is started. However, when the re-game is given, the execution start condition of the waiting effect is not satisfied.

Here, the standby effect will be described.
The standby effect in the present embodiment includes logo effects, various types of reminders, and character effects. In the slot machine 10, after the logo effect is executed, various attention calls are executed, and then the character effect is executed. For various types of reminders to be executed in standby production, reminders about goto acts, reminders about hitting gaming machines, reminders about immersion, reminders about leaving in a car, reminders about playing a game under 18 years old And, there is a warning about the sale of malicious capture methods. Although the details will be described later, the standby effect is repeatedly executed until the interruption condition of the standby effect is satisfied. Therefore, when the interruption condition of the standby effect is not satisfied, after the character effect in the standby effect is performed, the logo effect in the standby effect is performed again.

  Hereinafter, the display content of the effect display device 14 when the standby effect is performed will be described based on FIGS. 15 (a) to 15 (d) and FIGS. 16 (a) to 16 (d). When the standby effect is performed, the backlight BL is turned off. In addition, when the standby effect is performed, an image of one color (for example, white) is displayed in the transmissive region 14 a in the effect display device 14.

  As shown in FIG. 15A, when the execution of the standby effect is started, the effect display device 14 executes the logo effect. The logo effect may be, for example, an effect that displays the logo of the company that manufactured the gaming machine, or an effect that displays the company policy of the company that manufactured the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (b), after the end of the logo effect, in the effect display device 14, a warning regarding the goto action is executed. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays item images TK1 to TK6 indicating items of alerting. In the effect display device 14, the item image TK1 corresponding to the alert regarding the goto action among the item images TK1 to TK6 is displayed larger than the other item images TK2 to TK6. Then, the alert display image GT1 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding the goto action is executed. The alert image GT1 is "Goto action is" crime ". ] Is an image including characters (character information). That is, the content of the alert about the Goto act that is executed during the execution of the waiting effect is "crime". The content of the character (character information) is displayed. As described above, in the effect display device 14, a warning about a goto action is executed while the standby effect is being performed. In the slot machine 10, in the front view, the width of the warning image GT1 is longer than the width of one reel. The lateral width of one reel corresponds to the lateral width of one of the reels 13a to 13c.

  Further, the alert image GT1 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image GT1 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be viewed. Further, the display area in which the alert image GT1 is displayed is an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. As described above, the display area in which the alert image GT1 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a and is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (c), after the warning about the goto action is finished, the effect display device 14 executes a warning about hitting the gaming machine. Specifically, item images TK1 to TK6 are displayed on the effect display device 14. In the effect display device 14, an item image TK2 corresponding to a reminder regarding tapping the game machine among the item images TK1 to TK6 is displayed larger than the other item images TK1 and TK3 to TK6. Then, an alerting image GT2 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and an alerting about hitting the gaming machine is executed. Let's touch the "lightly and carefully" stand with the alert image GT2. ] Is an image including characters (character information). That is, the contents of the alert about hitting the gaming machine to be executed during the execution of the waiting effect, "Let's touch" Gently, carefully ". The content of the character (character information) is displayed. As described above, in the effect display device 14, a warning regarding the hitting of a gaming machine is executed while the standby effect is being executed. In the slot machine 10, in the front view, the width of the alert image GT2 is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image GT2 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area where the alert image GT2 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. In addition, the display area in which the alert image GT2 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. As described above, the display area where the alert image GT2 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a and is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

  As shown in FIG. 15 (d), after the alert regarding the hitting of the game machine is over, the effect display device 14 executes the alert regarding the intruding. Specifically, item images TK1 to TK6 are displayed on the effect display device 14. In the effect display device 14, the item image TK3 corresponding to the alert regarding the depression among the item images TK1 to TK6 is displayed larger than the other item images TK1, TK2, and TK4 to TK6. Then, the alert display image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the alert regarding the entanglement is executed. The alert image GT3 says, "Pachinko Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable game. "Let's pay attention to the letters" "(character information) and" ". ] (Character information) and it is an image containing. In other words, the content of the alert about the obsessiveness that is executed during the execution of the waiting production, "Pachinko Pachislot is a play that enjoys moderately. It is the content which displays the character (character information). In addition, please be careful about the contents of the alert about the obscurity that is executed during the execution of the waiting effect. It is the content which displays the character (character information). As described above, in the effect display device 14, a warning regarding the inset is executed while the standby effect is being performed. In this embodiment, “Pachinko and pachislot is a play that is enjoyed moderately. The letter (letter information) is equivalent to the first letter information, and let's be careful about the inclusion. ] Characters (character information) correspond to second character information. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the alert image GT3 corresponding to the predetermined alert image is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image GT3 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image GT3 is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area where the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alerting image GT3 is displayed in the display area other than the reel visual recognition area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the embedding is executed. In addition, the display area in which the alert image GT3 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alert image GT3 is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alert image relating to immersion in the predetermined effect area is executed by displaying the alert image GT3 in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alerting image GT3 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body It does not overlap with the

As shown in FIG. 16 (a), on the effect display device 14, after the end of the alerting for the inset, the alerting for leaving in the vehicle is executed. Specifically, item images TK1 to TK6 are displayed on the effect display device 14. Of the item images TK1 to TK6 in the effect display device 14, an item image TK4 corresponding to a warning regarding leaving in a vehicle is displayed larger than the other item images TK1 to TK3, TK5, and TK6. Then, the alert display image GT4 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding leaving in the vehicle is executed. The alert image GT4 is "Children's abuse". ] Is an image including characters (character information). That is, the contents of the alert regarding the in-vehicle leaving performed during execution of the waiting effect are
Child abuse. The content of the character (character information) is displayed. As described above, in the effect display device 14, a warning regarding vehicle leaving is executed while the standby effect is being executed. In the slot machine 10, in the front view, the width of the warning image GT4 is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image GT4 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display region in which the alert image GT4 is displayed is a display region different from the transmissive region 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be viewed. In addition, the display area in which the alert image GT4 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. As described above, the display area in which the alert image GT4 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a and is an area that does not overlap the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (b), after completion of the warning about leaving in a car, the effect display device 14 executes a warning about playing a game under 18 years old. Specifically, item images TK1 to TK6 are displayed on the effect display device 14. In the effect display device 14, an item image TK5 corresponding to a reminder regarding playing a game under 18 years old among the item images TK1 to TK6 is displayed larger than the other item images TK1 to TK4, TK6. Then, the alert display image GT5 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and an alert regarding playing a game under 18 years old is executed. Attention image GT5, "Pachinko Pachislo, after becoming" 18 years old ". ] Is an image including characters (character information). In other words, the content of the alert regarding playing a game under 18 years of age, which is executed during the execution of waiting effects, is that "Pachinko / Pachislo is" 18 ". The content of the character (character information) is displayed. In this manner, in the effect display device 14, a warning regarding playing a game under 18 years old is executed while the standby effect is being executed. In the slot machine 10, in the front view, the width of the alert image GT5 is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image GT5 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display region in which the alert image GT5 is displayed is a display region different from the transmissive region 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be viewed. Further, the display area in which the alert image GT5 is displayed is an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. As described above, the display area in which the alert image GT5 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a and is an area that does not overlap the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, after the end of the alert regarding playing a game under 18 years old, the effect display device 14 executes a alert regarding the sale of a malicious capture method. Specifically, item images TK1 to TK6 are displayed on the effect display device 14. In the effect display device 14, the item image TK6 corresponding to the alert regarding the sale of the malicious capture method among the item images TK1 to TK6 is displayed larger than the other item images TK1 to TK5. Then, the alert display image GT6 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and a alert regarding the sale of a malicious capture method is executed. Attention image GT6, beware of "sweet temptation". ] Is an image including characters (character information). That is, the contents of the alert about the sale of the malicious capture method executed during the execution of the waiting effect beware of "sweet temptation". The content of the character (character information) is displayed. As described above, in the effect display device 14, a warning regarding the sale of a malicious capture method is executed while the standby effect is being executed. In the slot machine 10, in the front view, the width of the alert image GT6 is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the alert image GT6 is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, the display area where the alert image GT6 is displayed is
In the effect display device 14 of the transmission type display, it is a display region different from the transmission region 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. In addition, the display area in which the alert image GT6 is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. As described above, the display area where the alert image GT6 is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a and is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (d), after the end of the warning regarding the sale of the malicious capture method, in the effect display device 14, the character effect is executed. The character effect may be, for example, an effect of an effect content introducing a character as a motif of the slot machine 10 or an effect of an effect content describing an effect executed in the slot machine 10.

  When the character effect is being performed, the effect display device 14 performs an effect relating to the operation of the menu button MB corresponding to a predetermined operation means. When the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB is executed, the image GMx is displayed on the effect display device 14. The image GMx is an image including characters (character information) “You can adjust the volume by pressing the menu button” as characters (character information) indicating that the volume can be adjusted by operating the menu button MB. . That is, in the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB, it is informed that the volume can be adjusted by operating the menu button MB. As described above, in the present embodiment, in the effect related to the operation of the predetermined operation means, it is informed that the volume can be adjusted by operating the predetermined operation means. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the image GMx is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the image GMx is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14 a. That is, the display area in which the image GMx is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display. In addition, the display area in which the image GMx is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in a front view. As described above, the display area in which the image GMx is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14 a and is an area not overlapping with the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the standby effect, after the alert about the stagnation is executed, the effect on the operation of the menu button MB is executed. That is, while the standby effect is being performed, after the alert regarding the inset is performed in the effect display device 14, the effect regarding the operation of the menu button MB as a predetermined operation means is performed.

Here, the case where the menu button MB is operated will be described.
In the present embodiment, when the menu button MB corresponding to the predetermined operation means is operated during execution of the standby effect, the execution of the standby effect is ended. For example, when the alerting image GT3 is displayed during the execution of the standby effect and the alert regarding the immersion is executed, the execution of the standby effect is finished when the menu button MB is operated, and the alert regarding the intrusion is Execution ends. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the inset is being performed during execution of the standby effect, the execution of the alert on the inset is ended when the menu button MB corresponding to the predetermined operation means is operated. Do.

As shown in FIG. 17A, when the menu button MB is operated when the variation game is not being executed, a menu is displayed on the effect display device 14. When the menu is displayed on the effect display device 14, item images KM 1 and KM 2 capable of specifying an item are displayed on the effect display device 14. The first item image KM1 is an item image that can specify an item related to volume customization (item related to volume adjustment). The second item image KM2 is an item image capable of specifying an item related to an effect to be executed in the gaming machine (an item related to effect explanation).

  In addition, when the menu is displayed on the effect display device 14, a selection image SS indicating the item being selected is displayed. The selected image SS is an image simulating an arrow. The selected image SS has either a display mode indicating the first item image KM1 (display mode shown in FIG. 17A) or a display mode indicating the second item image KM2 (FIG. 17B) Is displayed in the display mode shown in FIG. Then, when the right button SBb is operated when the selected image SS is displayed in a display mode indicating the first item image KM1 as shown in FIG. 17A, as shown in FIG. 17B. The selected image SS is displayed in a display mode indicating the second item image KM2. Similarly, when the left button SBd is operated while the selected image SS is displayed in a display mode pointing to the second item image KM2 as shown in FIG. 17B, as shown in FIG. 17A. The selected image SS is displayed in a display mode indicating the first item image KM1.

  As shown in FIG. 17C, when the selected image SS is displayed in a display mode indicating the first item image KM1, that is, when an item related to volume customization is selected, the determination button SBe is operated. When it is set, the display content of the effect display device 14 is the display content regarding volume adjustment. Specifically, on the effect display device 14, a first meter Ma and a second meter Mb are displayed.

  In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the volume of the character voice can be adjusted from among four levels. The first meter Ma includes four graduations Ma1 to Ma4. Then, the first meter Ma is displayed in a mode according to the stage set as the volume of the character voice. For example, when the volume of the character voice being set is at the third stage from the minimum volume, as shown in FIG. 17 (c), the effect display device 14 is colored in three scales Ma1 to Ma3. The first meter Ma is displayed.

  In the slot machine 10, when the first meter Ma is displayed, the volume of the character voice can be adjusted by operating the upper button SBa and the lower button SBc. And when 1st meter Ma is displayed, the up-and-down operation promotion picture Sac which imitates upper button SBa and lower button SBc is displayed near the display field where the said 1st meter Ma is displayed. Under conditions where the volume of the character voice can be adjusted, if the maximum volume is not reached within the adjustable range of the character voice, raise the volume of the character voice by one step when operating the upper button SBa. Can. When the volume of the character voice can not be adjusted and the volume of the character voice has not reached the minimum volume within the adjustable range, the volume of the character voice is lowered by one step when the lower button SBc is operated. It can be done. When the volume of the character voice is adjusted by the operation of the upper button SBa or the lower button SBc, the scale (the aspect of the first meter Ma) colored in the first meter Ma changes along with the adjustment.

  In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the volume of the background music can be adjusted from among four levels. The second meter Mb includes four graduations Mb1 to Mb4. Then, the second meter Mb is displayed in a mode according to the stage set as the volume of the background music. For example, when the volume of the background music set is the second stage from the minimum volume, as shown in FIG. 17C, the effect display device 14 is colored in two scales Mb1 and Mb2 The second meter Mb is displayed.

In the slot machine 10, when the second meter Mb is displayed, the volume of the background music can be adjusted by operating the right button SBb and the left button SBd. Then, when the second meter Mb is displayed, the left and right operation promotion image Sbd imitating the right button SBb and the left button SBd is displayed in the vicinity of the display area where the second meter Mb is displayed.
Under the condition that the volume of background music can be adjusted, when the right volume SBb is operated when the volume of background music does not reach the maximum volume within the adjustable range, the volume of background music is increased by one level Can. In addition, when the volume of the background music can be adjusted, if the volume of the background music has not reached the minimum volume within the adjustable range, the volume of the background music is lowered by one step when operating the left button SBd. It can be done. When the volume of the background music is adjusted by operating the right button SBb or the left button SBd, the scale colored in the second meter Mb (a form of the second meter Mb) changes along with the adjustment.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 17 (d), when the selected image SS is displayed in the display mode pointing to the second item image KM2, that is, when the item regarding the effect to be executed in the gaming machine is selected. When the determination button SBe is operated, the effect content of the effect display device 14 is the display content regarding effect description. Specifically, the effect display device 14 displays a first explanatory image PG1, a second explanatory image PG2, and a third explanatory image PG3.

  The first explanatory image PG1 shows that “when the star movable body operates, it is hot! The image corresponds to an image that includes the characters (character information), and that indicates that the expectation degree to be added when the star movable body 26 operates is high. The second explanatory image PG2 is an image including the characters (character information) of “○ according to the navigation during the advantageous effect state”, and in the advantageous effect state, the stop button 21a is an operation mode notified by the navigation effect It corresponds to an image for explaining that there is no problem if ~ 21c is operated. The third explanatory image PG3 is an image including characters (character information) that "the volume can be adjusted from the menu screen", and an image for explaining that the volume can be adjusted after the menu is displayed by operating the menu button MB. It corresponds to

  Further, in the slot machine 10, when the menu is displayed on the effect display device 14 and the menu button MB is displayed, the display of the menu is ended, and the effect display device 14 corresponds to the effect state during stay. The background image is displayed. Also, in the slot machine 10, when the menu button MB is displayed when the effect display device 14 is the display content regarding volume adjustment, the display of the menu is ended, and the effect display device 14 corresponds to the effect state during stay Background image is displayed. Similarly, in the slot machine 10, when the menu button MB is displayed when the effect display device 14 is the display content regarding the effect explanation, the display of the menu is ended and the effect display device 14 is in the effect state during stay. The corresponding background image is displayed.

Next, control relating to the menu will be described.
If the detection signal from the menu button MB is input while the variation game is not being executed, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the menu is displayed. Specifically, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first item image KM1, the second item image KM2, and the selection image SS are displayed. Here, the time when the variation game is not being executed is a period before the variation game start command is input, and corresponds to a period after the variation game end command is input.

Further, when the menu is displayed, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the selected image SS is displayed in a display mode that indicates the first item image KM1. In the case where the menu is displayed and the selected image SS is displayed in the display mode indicating the first item image KM1, the sub control CPU 41a receives the detection signal from the right button SBb. The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the selected image SS is displayed in a display mode that points to the two-item image KM2. On the other hand, when the menu is displayed and the selected image SS is displayed in the display mode pointing to the second item image KM2, the sub control CPU 41a receives a detection signal from the left button SBd. The effect display device 14 is controlled such that the selected image SS is displayed in a display mode that indicates the first item image KM1. Incidentally, when the menu is displayed, when the detection signal from the menu button MB is input, the sub control CPU 41a terminates the display of the menu and controls the effect state that can be identified from the effect state information. Then, the secondary control CPU 41a starts measuring the standby time.

  Then, when the detection signal from the determination button SBe is input when the item regarding volume adjustment is selected, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to be the display content regarding volume adjustment. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first meter Ma, the second meter Mb, the up and down operation promotion image Sac and the left and right operation promotion image Sbd are displayed. Incidentally, when the display content of the effect display device 14 is controlled to the display content regarding volume adjustment, when the detection signal from the menu button MB is input, the sub control CPU 41a terminates the display of the display content regarding volume adjustment. , It controls to the production state which can be specified from production state information. Then, the secondary control CPU 41a starts measuring the standby time.

  When control is made to the display content regarding volume adjustment, the sub control CPU 41a stores the detection signal in the sub control RAM 41c when the detection signal from the upper button SBa is input or when the detection signal from the lower button SBc is input. The value of the first volume flag being updated may be updated. Specifically, when the detection signal from the upper button SBa is input, when the volume that can be identified from the value of the first volume flag is not the maximum volume, the secondary control CPU 41a determines that the volume that can be identified from the first volume flag is 1 The value of the first sound volume flag is updated to a value that increases in level. Even when the detection signal from the upper button SBa is input, if the volume that can be identified from the value of the first volume flag has reached the maximum volume, the sub control CPU 41a determines the value of the first volume flag. Do not update On the other hand, when the detection signal from the lower button SBc is input, when the volume that can be identified from the value of the first volume flag is not the minimum volume, the sub-control CPU 41a reduces the volume that can be identified from the first volume flag by one step. The value of the first volume flag is updated to the value of Even when the detection signal from the lower button SBc is input, if the volume that can be identified from the value of the first volume flag has reached the minimum volume, the sub control CPU 41a determines the value of the first volume flag. Do not update

  On the other hand, when control is made to the display content related to volume adjustment, the sub control CPU 41a receives the detection signal from the right button SBb or the detection signal from the left button SBd, the sub control RAM 41c. The value of the second volume flag stored in may be updated. Specifically, when the detection signal from the right button SBb is input, when the volume that can be identified from the value of the second volume flag is not the maximum volume, the secondary control CPU 41a determines that the volume that can be identified from the second volume flag is 1 Update the value of the second volume flag to a value that increases in steps. Even when the detection signal from the right button SBb is input, if the volume that can be identified from the value of the second volume flag has reached the maximum volume, the sub control CPU 41a determines the value of the second volume flag. Do not update On the other hand, when the detection signal from the left button SBd is input, when the volume that can be identified from the value of the second volume flag is not the minimum volume, the sub-control CPU 41a reduces the volume that can be identified from the second volume flag by one step. Update the value of the second volume flag to the value Note that even when the detection signal from the left button SBd is input, when the volume that can be identified from the value of the second volume flag has reached the minimum volume, the sub control CPU 41a determines the value of the second volume flag. Do not update

  Then, when the detection signal from the determination button SBe is input when the item related to the effect explanation is selected, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to be the display content regarding the effect explanation. Specifically, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first explanatory image PG1, the second explanatory image PG2, and the third explanatory image PG3 are displayed. Incidentally, when the display content of the effect display device 14 is controlled to the display content regarding the effect description, the sub control CPU 41a ends the display of the display content regarding the effect description when the detection signal from the menu button MB is input. , It controls to the production state which can be specified from production state information. Then, the secondary control CPU 41a starts measuring the standby time.

Here, the special stagnation processing (step S123) in the game progression main processing will be described based on FIG.
In the specific stagnation process, the main control CPU 40a determines whether the first bonus effect state has ended (step S201). In step S201, the main control CPU 40a determines in the end process (step S122) whether the end condition of the first bonus gaming state is satisfied and the effect state flag is set to a value capable of specifying the effect state other than the bonus effect state. judge. Determining that the first bonus effect state has ended in step S201 corresponds to determining that the last variation game in the first bonus gaming state has ended.

  If the first bonus effect state has ended (step S201: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the first stagnation start command (step S202). In the output process of the first stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer. The first stagnation start command includes a special first stagnation start command and a non-special first stagnation start command. Then, after the end of the first bonus effect state, when it is controlled to the normal effect state on condition that the remaining advantageous upper limit value is "0", that is, the advantageous period by the occurrence of the first bonus game state If the termination condition of the above is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a stores the special first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S202. On the other hand, after the end of the first bonus effect state, when it is not controlled to the normal effect state on condition that the remaining advantageous upper limit value is “0”, that is, the first bonus game state is generated. If the termination condition is not satisfied, the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S202.

  Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs a measurement process of the ending time (step S203). In step S203, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined ending time, and stands by until the ending time elapses. Then, when the ending time has elapsed and the measurement process of the ending time is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the first stagnation end command (step S204), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the first stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation end command in the output buffer.

  If the first bonus effect state has not ended (step S201: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether the second bonus effect state has ended (step S205). In step S205, the main control CPU 40a determines in the end process (step S122) whether the end condition of the second bonus gaming state is satisfied and the effect state flag is set to a value capable of specifying the effect state other than the bonus effect state. judge. Determining that the second bonus effect state has ended in step S205 corresponds to determining that the final variation game in the second bonus gaming state has ended.

  When the second bonus effect state ends (step S205: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the second stagnation start command (step S206). In the output process of the second stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer. The second stagnation start command includes a special second stagnation start command and a non-special second stagnation start command. Then, after the end of the second bonus effect state, when it is controlled to the normal effect state on condition that the remaining advantageous upper limit value is "0", that is, the advantageous period by the occurrence of the second bonus game state If the termination condition of the above is satisfied, the main control CPU 40a stores the special second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S206. On the other hand, after the end of the second bonus effect state, when it is not controlled to the normal effect state on condition that the remaining advantageous upper limit value is “0”, that is, the second bonus game state is generated. If the termination condition is not satisfied, the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S206.

  Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs a measurement process of the ending time (step S207). In step S207, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined ending time, and stands by until the ending time elapses. Then, when the ending time has elapsed and the measurement process of the ending time is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the second stagnation end command (step S208), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the second stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation end command in the output buffer.

  If the second bonus effect state has not ended (step S205: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether the advantageous effect state has ended (step S209). In step S209, the main control CPU 40a sets, in the end process (step S122), a value capable of specifying the normal effect state in the effect state flag when the end condition (advantage end condition) of the advantageous effect state is satisfied. Determine if Determining that the advantageous rendering state has ended in step S209 corresponds to determining that the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state has ended.

  If the advantageous rendering state has not ended (step S209: NO), the main control CPU 40a ends the special stagnation process. On the other hand, when the advantageous rendering state ends (step S209: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the third stagnation start command (step S210). In the output process of the third stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation start command in the output buffer. The third stagnation start command includes a special third stagnation start command and a non-special third stagnation start command. Then, when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state and the normal effect state is controlled (the second end condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 40a outputs the special third stagnation start command in step S210. Store in buffer On the other hand, when the advantageous termination condition is satisfied in the first advantageous rendering state (or the second advantageous rendering state) and control is made to the normal rendering state (when the first termination condition is satisfied), the main control CPU 40a in step S210. Stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer.

  Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs a measurement process of the ending time (step S211). In step S211, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined ending time, and stands by until the ending time elapses. Then, when the ending time has elapsed and the measurement process of the ending time is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the third stagnation end command (step S212), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the third stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation end command in the output buffer.

In the present embodiment, the processes of steps S202 to S204, the processes of steps S206 to S208, and the processes of steps S210 to S212 correspond to stagnation control. In the following description, “the stagnation control is performed that the processing of step S202 to step S204 is performed, that the processing of step S206 to step S208 is performed, and that the processing of step S210 to step S212 is performed, respectively. Sometimes. In the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs stagnation control by executing any of the processing of steps S202 to S204, the processing of steps S206 to S208, and the processing of steps S210 to S212. A function as a control means is realized. Further, in the present embodiment, among the processing of step S202 to step S204, the processing of step S206 to step S208, and the processing of step S210 to step S212, the processing of step S203, step S207 and step S211 has a predetermined ending time. Control to measure, that is, measurement control of a predetermined ending time is performed. The stagnation control corresponds to freeze control, and execution of the stagnation control is also referred to as “freeze”.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of step S202 to step S204 and the processing of step S206 to step S208 are performed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state corresponding to the special state, so the final number in the special state It can be seen that stagnation control is performed after the game of. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the processing of step S210 to step S212 is performed after the end of the variation game in the advantageous production state corresponding to the specific state, so stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state. It is understood that

  In the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, when stagnation control is executed, the effect display device 14 executes ending effect. In the slot machine 10, during the execution of the ending effect, in the effect display device 14, an appearance effect in which a character appears may be performed. The effect contents of the appearance effect include effect contents in which the first character appears, effect contents in which the second character appears, and effect contents in which the third character appears.

  As shown in FIG. 19A, the content of the effect of the appearance effect is determined according to the set value that has been set. Specifically, when the set value is “1”, the effect content in which the first character appears with a probability of 90%, and the effect content in which the second character appears with a probability of 10% is determined as the effect content of the appearance effect Ru. When the setting value is “2”, the effect content in which the first character appears with a probability of 50%, and the effect content in which the second character appears with a probability of 50% is determined as the effect content of the appearance effect. If the setting value is "3", the effect content that the first character appears with a probability of 30%, the effect content that the second character appears with a probability of 60%, the third character appears with a probability of 10% The contents of the effect to be produced are determined as the contents of the effect of the appearance effect.

  In the present embodiment, only when the setting value is “3”, the effect content in which the third character appears is determined as the effect content of the appearance effect. Therefore, when the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears, it can be specified that "3" is set as the set value. That is, the effect content in which the third character appears corresponds to the effect content notifying that the setting value is "3". Further, in the present embodiment, the higher the degree of advantage of the setting value, the easier it is to determine the effect content in which the second character appears compared to the effect content in which the first character appears. Therefore, when the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the second character appears, it is suggested that the set value has a high degree of advantage. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the higher the advantage of the setting value, the higher the probability of winning the bonus combination, and the higher the probability that the bonus gaming state will be established. That is, in the slot machine 10, the higher the advantage of the setting value, the higher the advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state (in particular, the bonus gaming state). For this reason, the appearance effect can be said to be a specific effect that indicates or notifies an advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state. Further, the appearance effect can be said to be an effect that suggests or notifies the degree of advantage regarding the advantageous state by suggesting or notifying the set value that has been set.

  In addition, in the slot machine 10, during the execution of the ending effect, there may be a case in which the effect display device 14 performs a starry sky effect in which a star, a moon, or a planet is displayed. The contents of the starry sky production include the contents of three star-displayed contents, the contents of moon and stars displayed, and the contents of planets and stars displayed.

As shown in FIG. 19 (b), the contents of the effect of the starry sky effect are determined according to the set internal mode. Specifically, in the case of the first internal mode, the effect contents in which three stars are displayed with a probability of 70%, and the effect contents in which the moon and stars are displayed with a probability of 30% are determined as the effect contents of starry sky effect Ru. In the case of the second internal mode, the effect contents in which three stars are displayed with a probability of 40%, and the effect contents in which the moon and the stars are displayed with a probability of 60% are determined as effect contents for starry sky effect. In the third internal mode, three stars are displayed with a probability of 5%, the moon and stars are displayed with an 80% probability, planets and stars are displayed with a probability of 15% The content of the effect to be played is determined as the effect content of the starry sky effect.

  In the present embodiment, only when the third internal mode is set, the effect contents in which a planet and a star are displayed as effect contents of the starry sky effect are determined. Therefore, when the starry sky effect is performed with the effect contents in which the planet and the star are displayed, it can be specified that the third internal mode is selected. That is, the effect content in which the planet and the star are displayed corresponds to the effect content notifying that it is the third internal mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the higher the advantage of the internal mode, the easier it is to determine the effect contents in which the moon and the stars are displayed, compared to the effect contents in which three stars are displayed. Therefore, it is suggested that the advantage of the internal mode is high when the starry sky rendering is performed with the rendering contents in which the moon and the stars are displayed. Therefore, it can be said that the starry sky effect is an effect that suggests or notifies the degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state by suggesting or notifying the internal mode as the internal control state. As described above, in the slot machine 10, as the internal mode has a higher degree of advantage, the number of ceilings (that is, the upper limit number of times of playing required until the next advantageous rendering state is generated) tends to be smaller. That is, in the slot machine 10, the higher the advantage of the internal mode, the higher the advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state (in particular, the advantageous effect state). For this reason, it can be said that the starry sky effect is a specific effect that indicates or reports an advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state. In addition, the starry sky effect can be said to be an effect that suggests or notifies the degree of advantage related to the advantageous state by suggesting or notifying the upper limit number of times of games required until the advantageous state is generated next.

Next, various ending effects will be described.
The main control CPU 40a performs the processing of step S202 to step S204 of the special stagnation processing, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the ending display effect of the first bonus effect state is executed in the effect display device 14 . Further, after the processing of step S204 to step S206 of the special stagnation process is performed by the main control CPU 40a and the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the ending effect of the second bonus effect state . Further, the main control CPU 40a performs the processing of step S210 to step S212 of the special stagnation processing, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the ending display of the advantageous rendering state is executed in the effect display device 14.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (a), when the termination condition of the advantage period is not satisfied by the occurrence of the first bonus gaming state, the effect display device 14 after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state is completed. A warning image TGa is displayed on the screen, and a warning regarding depression is performed. Attention awakening image TGa, "Pachinko Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately. Let's be careful about the letters (letter information) and 'embedded'. ] (Character information) and it is an image containing. That is, in the case where the termination condition of the advantage period is not established by the occurrence of the first bonus gaming state, the warning about the entanglement after the end of the last variation game in the first bonus gaming state is “Pachinko · Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable game. It is the contents to display the letter of]. In addition, in the case where the termination condition of the advantage period is not established by the occurrence of the first bonus gaming state, the warning regarding the inundation after the end of the last variation game in the first bonus gaming state is Let's watch out. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the alert image TGa corresponding to the predetermined alert image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the alert image TGa is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGa is displayed is the reels 13a to 13 arranged on the rear side.
This is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as a reel visual recognition area in which c can be visually recognized. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alerting image TGa is displayed in the display area other than the reel viewable area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the embedding is executed. In addition, the display area in which the alert image TGa is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGa is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting image regarding the inset is executed in the predetermined effect area by displaying the alerting image TGa in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alerting image TGa is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body It does not overlap with the

  In the following description, the ending condition of the advantageous period is not satisfied by the occurrence of the first bonus gaming state, and the ending effect to be executed after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state is ended, Shown as the first ending effect. In the first ending effect, the image 60 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image 60, "Congratulations! ] Is an image including characters (character information).

  When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears when the first ending effect is performed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 imitating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGa. That is, in the effect display device 14, the alert image TGa is displayed on the front side of the image CH3. Further, when the starry sky effect is performed with the effect contents in which three stars are displayed when the first ending effect is performed, the effect display device 14 displays a three-star image YG1. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect or the starlit sky effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed.

  Further, when the first ending effect is being executed, the first special winning number effect concerning the number of game media acquired after the first bonus gaming state is started is executed. In the first ending effect, the first acquired number image GBa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the first special acquired number effect is executed. The first acquired number image GBa is an image showing the number of medals increased before the start of the first bonus gaming state until the end of the first bonus gaming state. Therefore, by displaying the first acquired number image GBa on the effect display device 14 and executing the first special acquired number effect, the number of game media that has increased since the start of the first bonus gaming state is notified.

  Note that the image 60 displayed when the first ending effect is performed continues to be displayed without being operated in the effect display device 14. That is, when stagnation control is executed after the last fluctuation game in the bonus gaming state, the specific image (for example, the image 60) displayed after the last fluctuation game continues to be displayed without being operated, and the identification The operation of the image is stagnant. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the special state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the specific image Operation is stagnated.

As shown in FIG. 20 (b), when the termination condition of the advantage period is satisfied by the occurrence of the first bonus gaming state, the effect display device 14 after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state is completed. A warning image TGb is displayed on the screen, and a warning regarding depression is performed. Attention alert image TGb, "Pachinko Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately. Let's be careful about the letters (letter information) and 'embedded'. ] (Character information) and it is an image containing. That is, in the case where the termination condition of the advantage period is established by the occurrence of the first bonus gaming state, the warning about the entanglement after the end of the last variation game in the first bonus gaming state is “Pachinko · Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable game. It is the contents to display the letter of]. Further, in the case where the termination condition of the advantage period is established by the occurrence of the first bonus gaming state, the warning about the inundation after the end of the variation game in the final number in the first bonus gaming state is Let's watch out. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the alert image TGb corresponding to the predetermined alert image is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image TGb is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14 a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGb is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alerting image TGb is displayed in the display area other than the reel viewable area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the embedding is executed. In addition, the display area in which the alert image TGb is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alerting image TGb is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting image relating to immersion is performed in the predetermined effect area by displaying the alerting image TGb in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alerting image TGb is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body It does not overlap with the

  In the following description, the ending condition of the advantage period is satisfied by the occurrence of the first bonus gaming state, and the ending effect to be executed after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state is ended, Shown as the second ending effect. In the second ending effect, the image 60 is displayed on the effect display device 14. In the second ending effect, the special image SP is displayed on the effect display device 14. The special image SP is an image including the characters of "completely conquered" (character information).

  When the second ending effect is executed, and the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the third character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 imitating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGb. That is, in the effect display device 14, the alert image TGb is displayed on the front side of the image CH3. In addition, when the starry sky effect is performed with the effect contents in which three stars are displayed when the second ending effect is performed, the effect display device 14 displays a three-star image YG1. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect or the starlit sky effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed. In addition, when the second ending effect is being performed, the first acquired number image GBa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the first special acquired number effect is executed.

  The image 60 displayed when the second ending effect is performed continues to be displayed in the effect display device 14 without being operated. In addition, the special image SP displayed when the second ending effect is performed continues to be displayed in the effect display device 14 without being operated. That is, when stagnation control is executed after the last fluctuation game in the bonus gaming state, the specific image (for example, the image 60) displayed after the last fluctuation game continues to be displayed without being operated, and the identification The operation of the image is stagnant. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the special state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the specific image Operation is stagnated.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (c), when the termination condition of the advantage period is not satisfied by the occurrence of the second bonus gaming state, the effect display device 14 after the final variation game in the second bonus gaming state is completed. A warning image TGc is displayed on the screen, and a warning regarding depression is performed. Attention image TGc, "Pachinko Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately. Let's be careful about the letters (letter information) and 'embedded'. ] (Character information) and it is an image containing. That is, in the case where the termination condition of the advantage period is not established by the occurrence of the second bonus gaming state, a warning regarding the entanglement after the end of the last variation game in the second bonus gaming state is “Pachinko · Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable game. It is the contents to display the letter of]. In addition, in the case where the termination condition of the advantage period is not established by the occurrence of the second bonus gaming state, the warning about the inundation after the end of the last variation game in the second bonus gaming state is “in the invading Let's watch out. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the alerting image TGc corresponding to the predetermined alerting image is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image TGc is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14 a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGc is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alerting image TGc is displayed in the display area other than the reel viewable area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the embedding is executed. Further, the display area in which the alert image TGc is displayed is an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alerting image TGc is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting regarding the embedding in the predetermined effect area is executed by displaying the alert image TGc in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alerting image TGc is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body It does not overlap with the

  In the following description, the ending condition of the advantageous period is not satisfied by the occurrence of the second bonus gaming state, and the ending effect to be executed after the final variation game in the second bonus gaming state is ended, Shown as the third ending effect. In the third ending effect, the image 61 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image 61 "Fight! ] Is an image including characters (character information).

  When the third ending effect is executed, and the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the first character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH1 imitating the first character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH1 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGc. That is, in the effect display device 14, the alert image TGc is displayed on the front side of the image CH1. Further, when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which the moon and the stars are displayed when the third ending effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays the image YG2 of the moon and the stars. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect or the starlit sky effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed.

Further, when the third ending effect is being executed, the second special winning number effect concerning the number of game media acquired after the second bonus gaming state is started is executed. In the third ending effect, the second acquired number image GBb is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the second special acquired number effect is executed. The second acquired number image GBb is an image showing the number of medals increased before the start of the second bonus gaming state until the end of the second bonus gaming state. Therefore, by displaying the second acquired number image GBb on the effect display device 14 and executing the second special acquired number effect, the number of game media that has increased since the start of the second bonus gaming state is notified.

  Note that the image 61 displayed when the third ending effect is performed continues to be displayed in the effect display device 14 without being operated. That is, when stagnation control is executed after the last fluctuation game in the bonus gaming state, the specific image (for example, the image 61) displayed after the last fluctuation game continues to be displayed without being operated, and the identification The operation of the image is stagnant. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the special state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the specific image Operation is stagnated.

  As shown in FIG. 20 (d), when the termination condition of the advantage period is satisfied by the occurrence of the second bonus gaming state, the effect display device 14 is completed after the last variation game in the second bonus gaming state. A warning image TGd is displayed on the screen, and a warning regarding depression is performed. Attention image TGd, "Pachinko Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. Let's be careful about the letters (letter information) and 'embedded'. ] (Character information) and it is an image containing. That is, in the case where the termination condition of the advantage period is established by the occurrence of the second bonus gaming state, the warning about the entanglement after the end of the last variation game in the second bonus gaming state is “Pachinko · Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable game. It is the contents to display the letter of]. In addition, in the case where the termination condition of the advantage period is established by the occurrence of the second bonus gaming state, the warning about the inundation after the end of the last variation game in the second bonus gaming state is Let's watch out. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the alerting image TGd corresponding to the predetermined alerting image is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image TGd is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 that does not include the transmissive area 14 a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGd is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alerting image TGd is displayed in the display area other than the reel viewable area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the embedding is executed. In addition, the display area in which the alert image TGd is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGd is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting image relating to immersion is performed in the predetermined effect area by displaying the alerting image TGd in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alerting image TGd is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body It does not overlap with the

  In the following description, the ending condition of the advantage period is satisfied by the occurrence of the second bonus gaming state, and the ending effect to be executed after the final variation game in the second bonus gaming state is ended, It is shown as the fourth ending effect. In the fourth ending effect, the image 61 is displayed on the effect display device 14. In the fourth ending effect, the special image SP is displayed on the effect display device 14.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the first character appears when the fourth ending effect is performed, the effect display device 14 displays an image C imitating the first character.
H1 is displayed. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH1 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGd. That is, in the effect display device 14, the alert image TGd is displayed on the front side of the image CH1. Further, when the starry sky effect is performed with the effect contents in which the moon and the stars are displayed when the fourth ending effect is performed, the effect display device 14 displays the image YG2 of the moon and the stars. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect or the starlit sky effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed. Further, when the fourth ending effect is being executed, the second acquired number image GBb is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the second special acquired number effect is executed.

  Note that the image 61 displayed when the fourth ending effect is performed continues to be displayed in the effect display device 14 without being operated. In addition, the special image SP displayed when the fourth ending effect is performed continues to be displayed in the effect display device 14 without being operated. That is, when stagnation control is executed after the last fluctuation game in the bonus gaming state, the specific image (for example, the image 61) displayed after the last fluctuation game continues to be displayed without being operated, and the identification The operation of the image is stagnant. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the special state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the specific image Operation is stagnated.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (a), when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the first advantageous effect state or the second advantageous effect state (when the first end condition is satisfied), the final variation game in the advantageous effect state After the end, the caution display image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14, and a warning regarding the inset is executed. Attention awakening image TGe, "Pachinko Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. Let's be careful about the letters (letter information) and 'embedded'. ] (Character information) and it is an image containing. That is, in the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state, the advantageous end condition is satisfied, and the warning about the entanglement after the end of the variation game of the final round in the advantageous rendering state is “Pachinko / Pachislot is appropriate It is a play to enjoy. It is the contents to display the letter of]. In addition, in the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state, when an advantageous ending condition is established, let's be careful about the "noticing the alert about the inundation after the final game of the variation game in the ineffective advantageous state". . ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in the front view, the width of the alert image TGe corresponding to the predetermined alert image is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image TGe is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14 a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGe is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alerting image TGe is displayed in the display area other than the reel viewable area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the embedding is executed. Further, the display area in which the alert image TGe is displayed is an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alerting image TGe is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting image regarding the embedding is performed in the predetermined effect area by displaying the alerting image TGe in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alert image TGe is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body. It does not overlap with the

In the following description, in the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state, the advantageous ending condition is satisfied, and the ending effect to be executed after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state is finished, the fifth Indicated as ending effect.

  When the fifth ending effect is executed, and the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the second character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH2 imitating the second character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH2 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGe. That is, in the effect display device 14, the alert image TGe is displayed on the front side of the image CH2. When the fifth ending effect is executed, and the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which three stars are displayed, the effect display device 14 displays an image YG1 of three stars. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect or the starlit sky effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed.

  Further, when the fifth ending effect is being executed, a specific number-of-earnings effect is executed regarding the number of game media acquired since the start of the advantageous period. In the fifth ending effect, the specific acquisition number image GBc is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the specific acquisition number effect is executed. The specific acquisition number image GBc is an image having contents indicating the number of medals increased before the start of the advantageous period until the end of the advantageous period. Therefore, by displaying the specific acquisition number image GBc on the effect display device 14 and executing the specific acquisition number effect, the number of gaming media that has increased since the start of the advantageous period is notified. In the present embodiment, the number of gaming media acquired after the start of the advantageous period is not limited to the number of gaming media acquired in the advantageous rendering state, but in the bonus gaming state generated in the middle of the advantageous rendering state The number of gaming media acquired is also included.

  Note that the specific acquisition number image GBc displayed when the fifth ending effect is performed continues to be displayed without being operated on the effect display device 14. That is, when stagnation control is executed after the last fluctuation game in the advantageous rendering state, the specific image (for example, the specific acquired number image GBc) displayed after the last fluctuation game continues to be displayed without being operated. , The motion of the particular image is stagnated. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the specific state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the specific image Operation is stagnated.

  As shown in FIG. 21 (b), when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state (when the second end condition is satisfied), after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is completed, the effect display device 14 A warning image TGf is displayed on the screen, and a warning regarding depression is performed. Attention image TGf, "Pachinko Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. Let's be careful about the letters (letter information) and 'embedded'. ] (Character information) and it is an image containing. That is, in the case of an advantageous end condition being established in the special advantageous rendering state, the alert about the entanglement after the final game in the advantageous rendering state after the final game is “playing pachinko and pachislot is moderately enjoyable. It is the contents to display the letter of]. Also, in the case of an advantageous end condition being established in the special advantageous rendering state, the alert regarding the entanglement after the end of the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state is “Please be careful about the entanglement. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the alert image TGf corresponding to the predetermined alert image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the alert image TGf is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14 a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alert image TGf is displayed in the display area other than the reel view area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the inset is executed. Further, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed is an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting image relating to immersion is performed in the predetermined effect area by displaying the alerting image TGf in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body It does not overlap with the

  In the following description, an ending effect performed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state is referred to as a sixth ending effect when the advantageous end condition is satisfied in the special advantageous effect state. In the sixth ending effect, the heart movable body 25 operates. Since the alerting image TGf is displayed in a region not overlapping the operation region of the heart movable body 25, the heart movable body 25 and the alerting image TGf are displayed in front view even when the heart movable body 25 operates. Does not suffer. In the sixth ending effect, the special image SP is displayed on the effect display device 14.

  When the sixth ending effect is executed, and the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the third character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 imitating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGf. That is, in the effect display device 14, the alert image TGf is displayed on the front side of the image CH3. Further, when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which the planet and the star are displayed when the sixth ending effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays the image YG3 of the planet and the star. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect or the starlit sky effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed. Further, when the sixth ending effect is being performed, the specific acquisition number image GBc is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the specific acquisition number effect is executed.

  Note that the specific acquisition number image GBc displayed when the sixth ending effect is performed continues to be displayed without being operated on the effect display device 14. In addition, the special image SP displayed when the sixth ending effect is performed continues to be displayed in the effect display device 14 without being operated. That is, when stagnation control is executed after the last fluctuation game in the advantageous rendering state, the specific image (for example, the specific acquired number image GBc) displayed after the last fluctuation game continues to be displayed without being operated. , The motion of the particular image is stagnated. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state, the specific image displayed after the final game in the specific state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the specific image Operation is stagnated.

Hereinafter, control relating to various ending effects will be described.
First, control relating to the first ending effect will be described.
When the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first ending effect is performed. Specifically, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alert image TGa is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S202 of the special stagnation process, the non-special first stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is executed. When the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image 60 is displayed.

When the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first acquired number image GBa is displayed. Specifically, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first acquired number image GBa of the content notifying the specific value from the first bonus acquired information is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 20A, when the value that can be identified from the first bonus in-progress acquisition information is “216”, the sub control CPU 41a includes characters (character information) of “216 acquisition”. The effect display device 14 is controlled to display the first acquired number image GBa.

  Further, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. Do. The sub control CPU 41a determines the content of the effect of the appearance effect according to the set value that has been set. Specifically, the sub control CPU 41a determines the content of the effect of the appearance effect according to the setting value that can be identified from the setting value information stored in the sub control RAM 41c. In the present embodiment, the sub control CPU 41a determines the content of the effect of the appearance effect under the determination probability shown in FIG. 19A according to the setting value that can be specified from the setting value information. The sub-control CPU 41a determines the contents of the appearance effect, as in the case where the first ending effect is performed, also when the second ending effect to the sixth ending effect described below are executed. Do.

  Further, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect contents is executed. Do. The sub control CPU 41a determines the contents of the starry sky effect according to the set internal mode. Specifically, the sub control CPU 41a determines the contents of the starry sky effect according to the internal mode that can be identified from the internal mode information stored in the sub control RAM 41c. In the present embodiment, the sub-control CPU 41a determines the content of the effect of the starry sky effect under the determination probability shown in FIG. 19 (b) according to the internal mode that can be specified from the internal mode information. The sub-control CPU 41a determines the contents of the starry sky effect as well as the first ending effect when the second to sixth ending effects described below are performed. Do.

  In addition, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control. As described above, in the special visual recognition control, the sub control CPU 41a controls the backlight BL so that the backlight BL is turned off. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that an image of one color is displayed in at least the transmissive region 14a of the effect display device 14.

  When the first ending effect is performed, that is, when the non-special first stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measuring the specific time after displaying the alerting image TGa. Then, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGa at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, a period from when measurement of a specific time is started to when the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. And in this embodiment, the execution period in which stagnation control including the ending time measured in Step S203 is performed is shorter than a specific time, that is, a specific period.

Further, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the first ending effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, the display of the image 60, the image relating to the appearance effect (for example, the image CH3), the image relating to the starry sky effect (for example the image YG1), and the first acquired number image GBa is ended The awakening image TGa continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the attention alert for depression after the final game in the special state until the specific time elapses. The attention warning continues to be implemented. In addition, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the alerting image TGa to end upon the input of the bet number setting command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution of the attention regarding the indent is ended when the bet number is set after the specific period after the execution of the attention regarding the indent is started after the final game in the special state.

  In addition, when the settlement command is input during execution of the first ending effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first ending effect is ended. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGa. In addition, even if the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a warns the user when the first ending effect is ended. It also ends the display of TGa. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed.

Next, control relating to the second ending effect will be described.
When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second ending effect is performed. Specifically, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alerting image TGb is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the special first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S202 of the special stagnation processing, the special first stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. Then, after the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is executed. When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image 60 is displayed. When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the special image SP is displayed.

  Further, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first acquired number image GBa is displayed. When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. . When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry effect effect of the determined effect content is executed. . When the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

  When the second ending effect is to be performed, that is, when the special first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the alerting image TGb. Then, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGb at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14.

  When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the second ending effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image 60, the image relating to the appearance effect, the image relating to the starry sky effect, the special image SP, and the first acquired number image GBa ends, the alert image TGb continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the attention alert for depression after the final game in the special state until the specific time elapses. The attention warning continues to be implemented. On the other hand, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub-control CPU 41a causes the display of the alerting image TGb to end upon the input of the bet number setting command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution of the attention regarding the indent is ended when the bet number is set after the specific period after the execution of the attention regarding the indent is started after the final game in the special state.

  In addition, when the settlement command is input during execution of the second ending effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second ending effect is ended. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGb. In addition, even if the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a warns the user when the second ending effect is ended. It also ends the display of TGb. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed.

Next, control relating to the third ending effect will be described.
When the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third ending effect is performed. Specifically, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alerting image TGc is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S206 of the special stagnation process, the non-special second stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is executed. When the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image 61 is displayed.

  Also, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second acquired number image GBb is displayed. Specifically, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second acquired number image GBb of the content notifying the specific value from the second bonus acquired information is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 20C, when the value which can be identified from the second bonus in-progress acquisition information is “81”, the sub control CPU 41a includes the character “character acquisition of 81 sheets” (character information). The effect display device 14 is controlled so that the second acquired number image GBb is displayed.

Further, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. Do. Further, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect contents is executed. Do. When the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

  When the third ending effect is performed, that is, when the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the alerting image TGc. Then, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGc at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, a period from when measurement of a specific time is started to when the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. And in this embodiment, the execution period in which stagnation control including the ending time measured in Step S207 is performed is shorter than a specific time, that is, a specific period.

  When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the third ending effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image 61, the image relating to the appearance effect, the image relating to the starry sky effect, and the second acquired number image GBb is ended, the alert image TGc continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the attention alert for depression after the final game in the special state until the specific time elapses. The attention warning continues to be implemented. In addition, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the alert image TGc to end upon the input of the bet number setting command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution of the attention regarding the indent is ended when the bet number is set after the specific period after the execution of the attention regarding the indent is started after the final game in the special state.

  In addition, when the settlement command is input while the third ending effect is being executed, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third ending effect is ended. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGc. In addition, even if the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a warns the user when the third ending effect is ended. The display of TGc is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed.

Next, control relating to the fourth ending effect will be described.
When the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth ending effect is performed. Specifically, when the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the warning image TGd is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the special second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S206 of the special stagnation processing, the special second stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. Then, after the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is executed. When the non-special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image 61 is displayed. When the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the special image SP is displayed.

  When the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second acquired number image GBb is displayed. When the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. . Further, when the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect content is executed. . When the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

  When the fourth ending effect is performed, that is, when the special second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the alerting image TGd. Then, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGd at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14.

  When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the fourth ending effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image 61, the image relating to the appearance effect, the image relating to the starry sky effect, the special image SP, and the second acquired number image GBb is ended, the alert image TGd continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the attention alert for depression after the final game in the special state until the specific time elapses. The attention warning continues to be implemented. Further, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the alert image TGd to end upon the input of the bet number setting command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, the execution of the attention regarding the indent is ended when the bet number is set after the specific period after the execution of the attention regarding the indent is started after the final game in the special state.

  In addition, when the settlement command is input while the fourth ending effect is being executed, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth ending effect is ended. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGd. In addition, even if the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a warns the user when the fourth ending effect is ended. Also stop displaying TGd. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed.

Next, control relating to the fifth ending effect will be described.
When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fifth ending effect is performed. Specifically, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alerting image TGe is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S210 of the special stagnation process, the non-special third stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is executed.

  In addition, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the specific acquisition number image GBc is displayed. Specifically, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the specific acquisition number image GBc of the content notifying the specific value from the advantageous period acquisition information is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 21A, when the value that can be specified from the advantageous period acquisition information is “1012”, the sub control CPU 41a determines the number of specific acquisitions including “Total 1012” characters (character information). The effect display device 14 is controlled to display the image GBc.

  Further, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. Do. Further, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect contents is executed. Do. When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

  When the fifth ending effect is to be performed, that is, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the alert image TGe. When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGe at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, a period from when measurement of a specific time is started to when the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. And in this embodiment, the execution period in which stagnation control including the ending time measured in Step S211 is performed is shorter than a specific time, that is, a specific period.

  When the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the fifth ending effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image relating to the appearance effect, the image relating to the starry sky effect, and the specific acquisition number image GBc is ended, the alerting image TGe continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the alert regarding the depression after the final game in the specific state to the elapse of the specific time. The attention warning continues to be implemented. Further, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the alerting image TGe to end upon the input of the bet number setting command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set after the specific period after the execution of the alerting on the indenting is started after the final game in the specific state, the execution of the alerting on the indenting ends.

When the settlement command is input during execution of the fifth ending effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fifth ending effect is ended. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGe. Even when the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a warns the user when ending the fifth ending effect. The display of TGe is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alert for the return of the storage medium is executed It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is To be executed.

Next, control relating to the sixth ending effect will be described.
When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the sixth ending effect is performed. Specifically, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the warning image TGf is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S210 of the special stagnation processing, the special third stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. Then, after the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is executed. When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the special image SP is displayed.

  In addition, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the specific acquisition number image GBc is displayed. When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. . When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect contents of the starry sky effect and controls the effect display device 14 so that the starry sky effect of the determined effect content is executed. . When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control. In addition, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the first actuator A1 to operate the heart movable body 25.

  When the sixth ending effect is to be performed, that is, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the warning image TGf. Then, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGf at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14.

  In addition, when the bet number setting command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the sixth ending effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image relating to the appearance effect, the image relating to the starry sky effect, the special image SP, and the specific acquisition number image GBc ends, the alert image TGf continues to be displayed. At this time, the heart movable body 25 moves to the origin 25a and returns to the origin 25a. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the alert regarding the depression after the final game in the specific state to the elapse of the specific time. The attention warning continues to be implemented. Further, when the bet number setting command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the alerting image TGf to end upon the input of the bet number setting command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, when the bet number is set after the specific period after the execution of the alerting on the indenting is started after the final game in the specific state, the execution of the alerting on the indenting ends.

  Further, when the settlement command is input while the sixth ending effect is being executed, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the sixth ending effect is ended. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGf. In addition, even if the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a warns the user when ending the sixth ending effect The display of TGf is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed.

Here, attention will be given to the warning regarding the penetration performed in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to execute a warning (shown in FIG. 15 (d)) regarding immersion which is executed when the warning image GT3 is displayed. In addition, the slot machine 10 relates to the alerting (shown in FIG. 20 (a)) regarding the indentation performed by displaying the alerting image TGa and the embedding performed by the alerting image TGb displayed. The alerting (shown in FIG. 20B) is configured to be executable. In addition, the slot machine 10 relates to the alerting (shown in FIG. 20 (c)) regarding the indentation performed by displaying the alerting image TGc and the embedding performed by the alerting image TGd displayed. The alerting (shown in FIG. 20D) is configured to be executable. In addition, the slot machine 10 relates to the alerting (shown in FIG. 21A) regarding the indentation performed by displaying the alerting image TGe and the embedding performed by the alerting image TGf displayed. A reminder (shown in FIG. 21B) is configured to be executable.

  Then, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the immersion performed by displaying the alert image GT3 corresponds to the alert regarding the integration performed during execution of the standby effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the immersion performed by displaying the alert image TGa and the alert related to the integration performed by displaying the alert image TGb are the first bonus games. It corresponds to a reminder about the instillation to be executed after the final variation game in the state. Further, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the depression performed by displaying the alert image TGc, and the alert related to the installation performed by displaying the alert image TGd are the second bonus games. It corresponds to a reminder about the instillation to be executed after the final variation game in the state. Further, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the immersion performed by displaying the alert image TGe and the alert regarding the integration performed by displaying the alert image TGf are in the advantageous rendering state. It corresponds to a warning about the entanglement to be executed after the final variation game.

Attention awakening image GT3, TGa-TGf are all play that pachinko and pachislot are enjoyed moderately. "Let's pay attention to the letters""(character information) and"". ] (Character information) and it is an image containing. That is, it is executed during execution of standby effect, after the last variation game in the first bonus gaming state, after the last variation game in the second bonus gaming state, and after the last variation game in the advantageous presentation state The content of the alert about the sorrow is "Pachinko / Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. ] Is the content which displays the character. In addition, during the execution of the standby effect, after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state, after the final variation game in the second bonus gaming state, and after the final variation game in the advantageous presentation state As for the contents of the alerting about め, let's be careful about の. ] Is the content which displays the character.

  As described above, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed after the final variation game in the bonus game. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed after the final variation game in the bonus game is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed during the execution of the standby effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed after the final game in the special state.

  Note that, in the present embodiment, when the single bonus gaming state is generated even in the bonus game, the alert regarding the embedding is not executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the single bonus gaming state corresponding to the second special state is generated, the alert regarding the embedding is not executed, and the specific bonus gaming state corresponding to the first special state is generated. The alert about the enthusiasm is executed. In the present embodiment, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect can be said to be the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed after the final variation game in the specific bonus gaming state.

  Further, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed after the last variation game in the advantageous rendering state. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed after the last variation game in the advantageous rendering state is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed during the execution of the waiting effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed after the final game in the specific state.

  Further, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed after the last variation game in the bonus gaming state is the same as the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering status. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed after the last variation game in the advantageous rendering state is the same as the content of the alert regarding the indentation performed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed after the final game in the special state is the same as the content of the alert regarding the intrusion performed after the final game in the specific state.

As described above, in the slot machine 10, during the execution of the standby effect, after the last variation game in the first bonus gaming state, after the last variation game in the second bonus gaming state, and in the advantageous presentation state After the fluctuation game, the contents of the alert regarding the inset are executed in common are the same. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed after the final game in the specific state is the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect, and the final number in the special status. It is the same as the content of the alert about the instillation to be executed after the game. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed after the final game in the special state is executed after the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect and the final game in the specific state The content is the same as the content of the alert regarding infiltration. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect is performed after the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed after the final game in the special state and after the final game in the specific status The content is the same as the content of the alert regarding め.

  In the slot machine 10, “pachinko / pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play, when a warning regarding the soaking up is executed. The warning display image GT3 including the characters “character information” and TGa to TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. "Pachinko pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. In the characters “characters” (character information) indicating a pachinko gaming machine in which the game ball is used as a game medium and characters “characters” indicating a slot machine in which a medal is used as a game medium (character information) And is included. In other words, "Pachinko Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. In the character (character information), the alert about the embedded in the variation game (game) with pachinko gaming machine and the alert about the embedded in the variation game (game) in the slot machine are included . That is, in the present embodiment, the contents of the alert regarding the entanglement are pachinko gaming machines (the first for the pachinko gaming machine (the first gaming medium used as a game medium), in addition to the alert for the embedded 2 includes a reminder about the game's instillation in the gaming machine in which the gaming media of 2 are used as gaming media. The alert on the game intruding in the slot machine (the gaming machine in which the first game medium is used as a game medium) corresponds to the alert on the intruding on playing the slot machine, and relates to the intruding on the slot machine It corresponds to alerting. Similarly, the alerting about the embedded in the game with the pachinko gaming machine (the gaming machine in which the second gaming medium is used as the gaming medium) corresponds to the alerting about the embedded into playing the pachinko gaming machine, pachinko It corresponds to alerting about the immersion into the gaming machine.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the game arcade, there is a game arcade in which, for example, slot machines in which medals are used as game media and pachinko gaming machines in which game balls are used as game media are installed. As described above, in the game arcade, there is a game arcade where game machines using different game media are installed. In such a game arcade, one player may enjoy the fluctuation game with the pachinko gaming machine, or may enjoy the fluctuation game with the slot machine before or after that. Therefore, in the slot machine 10, in addition to the alerting about the embedded game in the slot machine, the alert about the embedded game with the content including the alert about the embedded game in the pachinko gaming machine is effective. Can be alerted on the

  In addition, "pachinko pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately. Among the characters, the characters "pachinko and pachislot" can be said to be characters (character information) indicating the entire gaming machine. And, "Pachinko Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. Among the characters, "pachislot" can be said to be characters (character information) indicating the slot machine 10 for displaying the alert images GT3 and TGa to TGf, that is, characters (character information) indicating the gaming machine. In this case, the content of the alert regarding the entanglement can be said to include an alert relating to the enthusiasm to the game machine in general, in addition to the alert on the entrapment in the variable game in the game machine.

  Further, in the slot machine 10, even if any one of the warning images GT3 and TGa to TGf is displayed and the warning regarding the embedding is executed, the content of the warning regarding the embedding is the same. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the mode of alerting regarding the penetration is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 15 (d), FIG. 20 (a) to FIG. 20 (d), FIG. 21 (a) and FIG. 21 (b), attention display image GT3 is displayed on effect display device 14 Is different from the position at which the alerting images TGa to TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the size of the alerting image GT3 displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the sizes of the alerting images TGa to TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the alert display image GT3 is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the alert display images TGa to TGf are displayed in the effect display device 14. Further, the font of characters (character information) included in the alert image GT3 is different from the font of characters (character information) included in the alert images TGa to TGf. Further, the color of characters included in the alert image GT3 (so-called, character color) is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa to TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alerting image GT3 is different from the size of the characters included in the alerting images TGa to TGf. Here, the position to be displayed, the size, the display area to be displayed, the font of characters included in the image, the font of characters included in the image, the color of characters included in the image, and the image for the image displayed when the alert regarding the embedding is performed It has been shown that all of the sizes of the characters contained in are different, but if at least one of them is different, it can be said that the manner of alerting regarding the embedding is different.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of alerting regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of alerting regarding the embedding performed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state. In other words, the mode of alerting regarding immersion performed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state is different from the embodiment of alerting regarding integration performed during execution of the standby effect. As described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the alert regarding the immersion performed during execution of the waiting effect is different from the aspect of the alert regarding the indentation performed after the final game in the special state.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the alerting regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect is different from the aspect of the alerting regarding the embedding performed after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state. In other words, the aspect of the alerting regarding the immersion performed after the last variation game in the advantageous rendering state is different from the aspect of the alerting regarding the embedding performed during the execution of the standby rendering. As described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the alert regarding the immersion performed during execution of the waiting effect is different from the aspect of the alert regarding the indentation performed after the final game in the specific state.

  As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d) and FIGS. 21 (a) and 21 (b), the positions at which the attention calling images TGa to TGd are displayed on the effect display device 14 are the effect display devices 14. Are different from the positions at which the alert images TGe and TGf are displayed. Further, the sizes of the alerting images TGa to TGd displayed on the effect display device 14 are different from the sizes of the alerting images TGe and TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the alerting images TGa to TGd are displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the alerting images TGe and TGf are displayed in the effect display device 14. Further, the font of characters included in the alert images TGa to TGd is different from the font of characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. Further, the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa to TGd is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa to TGd is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed after the last variation game in the advantageous rendering state is the aspect of the alert notification regarding the immersion executed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state It is different from In other words, the aspect of the alert regarding the immersion performed after the last variation game in the bonus gaming state is different from the aspect of the alert regarding the indentation performed after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the alert regarding depression embedded after the final game in the specific state is different from the aspect of the alert regarding indentation embedded after the final game in the special state.

As shown in FIGS. 20 (a) to 20 (d), in the effect display device 14, a warning image T is displayed.
The positions where Ga and TGb are displayed are different from the positions where the attention calling images TGc and TGd are displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the sizes of the alert images TGa and TGb displayed on the effect display device 14 are different from the sizes of the alert images TGc and TGd displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the alerting images TGa and TGb are displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the alerting images TGc and TGd are displayed in the effect display device 14. Further, the font of characters included in the alert images TGa and TGb is different from the font of characters included in the alert images TGc and TGd. Further, the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa, TGb is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGc, TGd. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGb is different from the size of the characters included in the alert images TGc and TGd.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed after the final fluctuation game in the first bonus gaming state relates to the immersion performed after the final fluctuation game in the second bonus gaming state. It differs from the alerting mode. In other words, the mode of alerting regarding the immersion performed after the final variation game in the second bonus gaming state is different from the aspect of the alerting regarding the indentation performed after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 20A and 20B, the position where the alerting image TGa is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the position where the alerting image TGb is displayed in the effect display device 14 . Further, the size of the alerting image TGa displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the alerting image TGb displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the alerting image TGa is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the alerting image TGb is displayed in the effect display device 14. In addition, the font of the characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the font of the characters included in the alert image TGb. Further, the color of the characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the color of the characters included in the alert image TGb. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the size of the characters included in the alert image TGb.

  Similarly, as shown in FIGS. 20 (c) and 20 (d), the position where the alerting image TGc is displayed in the effect display device 14 is the position where the alerting image TGd is displayed in the effect display device 14. It is different. Further, the size of the alerting image TGc displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the alerting image TGd displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the alerting image TGc is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the alerting image TGd is displayed in the effect display device 14. In addition, the font of the characters included in the alert image TGc is different from the font of the characters included in the alert image TGd. Further, the color of the characters included in the alert image TGc is different from the color of the characters included in the alert image TGd. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alerting image TGc is different from the size of the characters included in the alerting image TGd.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed when the termination condition of the advantageous period is satisfied by the occurrence of the bonus gaming state is advantageous when the bonus gaming state is generated. This is different from the mode of alerting regarding immersion performed when the end condition of the period is not satisfied. As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the indenting performed when the termination condition of the advantage period is satisfied by the occurrence of the special condition is the termination of the advantage period by the occurrence of the special condition. This is different from the alerting mode regarding depression performed when the condition does not hold. That is, in this embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the inset is the case where the termination condition of the advantage period is satisfied by the occurrence of the special condition, and the termination condition of the advantage period is not satisfied by the occurrence of the special condition The case is different.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 21A and 21B, the position where the alerting image TGe is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the position where the alerting image TGf is displayed in the effect display device 14 . Further, the size of the alerting image TGe displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the alerting image TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area where the alerting image TGe is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the alerting image TGf is displayed in the effect display device 14. In addition, the font of the characters included in the alert image TGe is different from the font of the characters included in the alert image TGf. Further, the color of the characters included in the alert image TGe is different from the color of the characters included in the alert image TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the warning image TGe is different from the size of the characters included in the warning image TGf.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed when the termination condition of the advantageous rendering state is satisfied in the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state is advantageous in the special advantageous rendering state. This is different from the mode of alerting regarding immersion performed when the end condition of the rendering state is satisfied. As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the indentation performed when the first end condition is satisfied among the end conditions of the specific state and the specific state ends is the first of the end conditions of the specific state. (2) It differs from the warning alerting process performed when the end condition is satisfied and the specific state ends. That is, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the intrusion differs between the case where the first end condition is satisfied and the specific state is ended and the case where the second end condition is satisfied and the specific state is ended.

  Here, based on FIGS. 23 (a) to 23 (c), after the last variation game in the first bonus gaming state, after the last variation game in the advantageous rendering state, and during the execution of the standby effect, It will be described while comparing the display contents of the effect display device 14 at the time when the alert regarding the inset is executed. FIG. 23 (a) shows the display contents of the effect display device 14 when the alert about the entanglement is executed after the last variation game in the first bonus gaming state, but the first bonus gaming state is It is assumed that the termination condition of the advantageous period is not satisfied by being generated. Further, FIG. 23 (b) shows the display contents of the effect display device 14 when the alert regarding the entanglement is executed after the last variation game in the advantageous effect state, but before the end of the advantageous effect state, special It is assumed that the game is not in the advantageous rendering state (for example, in the first advantageous rendering state).

  As shown in FIG. 23 (a), after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, a warning image TGa is displayed, and a warning regarding depression is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state, the alert image TGe is displayed, and alerting regarding the intrusion is executed. Further, as shown in FIG. 23 (c), while the waiting effect is being executed, the alert image GT3 is displayed, and an alert regarding the inset is executed. The alert images GT3, TGa, and TGe each include the same character (character information). For this reason, after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state, after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state, and during the execution of the standby effect, the content of the alerting regarding the immersion performed is the same. Become.

  On the other hand, as described above, the alert images GT3, TGa, and TGe have different positions and display areas displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the alert images GT3, TGa, and TGe have different sizes. In addition, characters included in the alert image GT3, TGa, and TGe differ in font, color, and size, respectively. For this reason, after the final fluctuation game in the first bonus gaming state, after the last fluctuation game in the advantageous rendering state, and during the execution of the standby effect, the aspect of the alerting regarding the immersion performed is different.

However, in front view, the display area in which the alert images GT3, TGa, and TGe are displayed on the effect display device 14 is an area that does not overlap the operation area of the heart movable body 25. That is, the attention calling images GT3, TGa, and TGe are common in that they are displayed in an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in the front view, among the display areas of the effect display device 14.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 23 (a), when the alerting image TGa is displayed after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state and the alert regarding the inset is being executed, the image CH2 is displayed. An appearance effect is executed. In the appearance effect, the set value that has been set is suggested or notified. In addition, when the alerting image TGa is displayed after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state and alerting regarding immersion is executed, the image YG3 of the planet and the star is displayed and the starlit sky effect is executed . In starry sky presentation, an internal mode is suggested or notified. Further, after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state, the alerting image TGa is displayed in a display area different from the transmissive area 14a, and an alert regarding the inset is executed. In addition, when the alerting image TGa is displayed after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state and alerting regarding immersion is executed, the backlight BL is extinguished. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the reel and the symbol from the transmission area 14a. In addition, when the alerting image TGa is displayed after the last variation game in the first bonus gaming state and alerting regarding immersion is being performed, the transmissive region 14a of the effect display device 14 which is a transmissive display has one color The image of is displayed. As a result, it becomes difficult to visually recognize the reel and the symbol from the transmission area 14a.

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 23 (b), when the warning image TGe is displayed after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state and the warning regarding the immersion is executed, the image CH1 is displayed and appeared The presentation is performed. Further, when the alerting image TGe is displayed after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state and the alert regarding the immersion is being executed, the moon and star image YG2 is displayed and the starry sky rendering is executed. Further, after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state, the alert image TGe is displayed in a display area different from the transmissive area 14a, and an alert regarding the inset is executed. Further, when the alerting image TGe is displayed after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state, and the alert regarding the embedding is being executed, the backlight BL is turned off. In addition, when the alerting image TGe is displayed after the last variation game in the advantageous rendering state, and the alert regarding the immersion is being executed, an image of one color is displayed in the transmissive region 14a of the effect display device 14 which is a transmissive display. Is displayed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 23C, when the warning image GT3 is displayed during the execution of the waiting effect and the warning regarding the inset is being performed, the appearance effect is not performed. In addition, when the alerting image GT3 is displayed during the execution of the standby effect and the alerting regarding the immersion is being performed, the starry sky effect is not performed. When the alerting image GT3 is displayed during the execution of the waiting effect and the alert regarding the inset is being executed, the backlight BL is turned off. In addition, when the alerting image GT3 is displayed during the execution of the standby effect and the alert regarding the immersion is executed, an image of a single color is displayed in the transmissive region 14a of the effect display device 14 which is a transmissive display. .

Next, after the end of the first bonus gaming state, after the end of the single bonus gaming state, and after the end of the first advantageous rendering state will be described based on FIGS. 24 (a) to 24 (c).
As shown in FIG. 24 (a), after the final variation game in the first bonus game state, execution of stagnation control is started at timing t11. In the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state, it is assumed that the bell combination is won. Further, it is assumed that the effect state controlled after the end of the first bonus game state, that is, after the end of the first bonus effect state is the normal effect state.

  In stagnation control started at timing t11, measurement processing of a predetermined ending time is performed, and stagnation control is continued at least during the ending time. In addition, when execution of stagnation control is started at timing t11, the first ending effect is executed. At this time, an alerting image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding immersion is executed. Further, it is assumed that the bet button 18 is operated at a timing t12 before the ending time has elapsed since the start of the stagnation control. At timing t12, since the stagnation control is being performed, the bet number is not set even if the bet button 18 is operated.

  In addition, when the bet number is set by operation of the bet button 18 or the like at the timing t13 before the specific time from the timing t11 after the ending time has elapsed from the timing t11, for example, Execution of the ending effect of is finished. At this time, the display is controlled to the normal effect state, and the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the normal effect state. However, from the timing t11 to the timing t14 when the specific time elapses, the alert display image 14 continues to display the alerting image TGa, and the alerting regarding the intrusion continues to be executed.

  On the other hand, if the bet number is set by operating the bet button 18 or the like at timing t15 after the ending time has elapsed from the timing t11 and after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t11, Execution of the ending effect of 1 ends. At this time, the display is controlled to the normal effect state, and the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the normal effect state. In addition, with the end of the execution of the first ending effect, the display of the alerting image TGa is also terminated, and the alerting regarding the inset is terminated.

  Incidentally, when the waiting time elapses without the bet number being set even after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t11, the execution of the waiting effect is started. Then, during execution of the standby effect, the alerting image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding the inset is executed. In this case, since the first ending effect is continuously performed until the waiting time elapses, the attention display image 14 continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the penetration continues to be executed. As described above, after a payout alert is performed after the payout winning combination is won in the final game in the special state, the alert regarding the immersion is executed at least until a specific time has elapsed. Furthermore, when the predetermined waiting time elapses without setting the bet number thereafter, the execution of the standby effect is started, and the alert regarding the indent is performed during the execution of the standby effect.

  In addition, if the bet number is not set even if the bet number is set by operating the bet button 18 or the like at timing t12 when stagnation control is being executed, the normal effect state in which the next effect state is entered It is not controlled by On the other hand, if it is attempted to set the bet number by operating the bet button 18 at timing t13 and timing t15 after the stagnation control is finished, the bet number is set, and control is made to the normal effect state where the next effect state is reached. The Rukoto. Therefore, the execution of the stagnation control stagnates being controlled to the effect state to be controlled after the end of the first bonus game state. As described above, when stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, it is controlled to the special effect mode (effect state controlled after the end of the bonus game state) after the final game in the special state. It is stagnant.

As shown in FIG. 24 (b), when the single bonus combination is won in the variation game executed while being controlled to the normal effect state, the single bonus game state is controlled, but the effect state is the normal effect state Is continuously controlled. Then, when one variation game is executed in the single bonus gaming state and the single bonus gaming state ends, no ending effect is executed after the end of the single bonus gaming state. Further, after the end of the single bonus gaming state, stagnation control is not executed. In addition, after the end of the single bonus gaming state, the alert regarding the stagnation is not executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 24 (a) and 24 (b), in the slot machine 10, stagnation control is executed after the end of the first bonus gaming state, while stagnation control is executed after the end of the single bonus gaming state I will not. Further, in the slot machine 10, the alert regarding the stagnation is executed after the end of the first bonus gaming state, but the alert regarding the telescoping is not executed after the termination of the single bonus gaming state.

  As shown in FIG. 24C, after the final variation game in the first advantageous rendering state, execution of stagnation control is started at timing t21. In the final variation game in the first advantageous rendering state, it is assumed that the re-play combination is won. In addition, it is assumed that the effect state controlled after the end of the first advantageous effect state is the normal effect state.

  In stagnation control started at timing t21, measurement processing of a predetermined ending time is performed, and stagnation control is continued at least during the ending time. Further, when execution of stagnation control is started at timing t21, a fifth ending effect is executed. At this time, an alerting image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding the inset is executed. Further, it is assumed that the start lever 20 is operated at a timing t22 before the ending time has elapsed since the start of the stagnation control. At timing t22, since the stagnation control is being executed, the fluctuation game is not executed even if the start lever 20 is operated when the replay is given.

  In addition, when the start lever 20 is operated at timing t23 before the end time has elapsed from the timing t21 and before the specific time has elapsed from the timing t21, the execution of the fifth ending effect ends. At this time, the display is controlled to the normal effect state, and the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the normal effect state. In addition, at the timing t23, the fluctuation game is executed triggered by the operation of the start lever 20. Note that from the timing t21 to the timing t24 when the specific time elapses, the alert display image 14 continues to display the alerting image TGe, and the alerting regarding the intrusion continues to be executed.

  On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated at timing t25 after the ending time has elapsed from the timing t21 and after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t21, the execution of the fifth ending effect ends. . At this time, the display is controlled to the normal effect state, and the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the normal effect state. Also, with the end of the execution of the fifth ending effect, the display of the alerting image TGe is also terminated, and the alerting regarding the inset is terminated. In addition, at the timing t25, the fluctuation game is executed when the start lever 20 is operated.

  Incidentally, when the start lever 20 is not operated even after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t21, the fifth ending effect is continuously performed, and the attention display image 14 continues to display the alerting image TGe, so that the attention on the inset is realized. The awakening continues to be carried out. However, the standby effect is not executed even when the standby time elapses without the start lever 20 being operated even after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t21. As described above, after the alert regarding the immersion is performed after the replay player is won in the final game in the specific state, the alert regarding the embedding is executed at least until the specific time has elapsed, Even after that, even when the predetermined waiting time has elapsed, the waiting effect is not performed.

  Even when the replay control is given at timing t22 when stagnation control is executed, the next variation game is not executed even if the start lever 20 is operated, and control is performed to the normal effect state in which the next effect state is attained. There is no On the other hand, when replaying is given at timing t23 or timing t25 after the stagnation control is ended, if the start lever 20 is operated, the next variation game is executed, and control is made to the normal rendering state to be the next rendering state It will be done. Therefore, execution of the stagnation control results in stagnation of being controlled to the effect state to be controlled after the end of the first advantageous effect state. As described above, when stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state, the specific effect mode (effect state (normal effect state controlled after termination of the advantageous effect state) after the final game in the specific state is performed. It is stagnated to be controlled. In addition, execution of the stagnation control causes the execution of the next variation game to be stalled.

  Further, when transitioning from the first advantageous rendering state to the normal rendering state, the alerting image TGe is displayed and the alerting about the inset is executed prior to the first variation game in the transitioning normal rendering state. That is, in the present embodiment, when transitioning from the first specific state to the normal state, a warning regarding immersion is performed prior to the first game in the transitioning normal state. As described above, when transitioning from the first advantageous rendering state to the normal rendering state, a warning about the inset is to be executed after execution of stagnation control is started after the final variation game in the first advantageous rendering state. ing. Furthermore, after the execution of the alert regarding the inset is started, the transition to the normal rendering state is made. That is, in the present embodiment, when transitioning from the first specific state to the normal state, the alert regarding the burying is performed after the execution of stagnation control is started after the final game in the first specific state. Then, after the execution of the alert regarding the inset is started, it shifts to the normal state.

  Although not illustrated, when transitioning from the first advantageous rendering state to the second advantageous rendering state is not the case when the advantageous rendering state ends and the transition to the normal rendering state is made, the alert regarding the inset is not executed. In other words, when transitioning from the first advantageous rendering state to the second advantageous rendering state, the alert regarding the immersion is not executed prior to the first variation game in the transitioning second advantageous rendering state. That is, in the present embodiment, when transitioning from the first specific state to the second specific state, the alert regarding the intrusion is not executed prior to the first game in the transitioning second specific state. As described above, in the present embodiment, when transitioning from the first specific state to the second specific state, the alerting regarding the stagnation is not executed prior to the first game in the second specific state to be shifted, and the first specific When transitioning from the state to the normal state, a warning regarding immersion is performed prior to the first game in the transitioning normal state.

  Further, even when transitioning from the second advantageous rendering state to the first advantageous rendering state, it is not the case that the advantageous rendering state ends and the transition to the normal rendering state is made, so the alert regarding the inset is not executed. That is, when transitioning from the second advantageous rendering state to the first advantageous rendering state, the alert regarding the immersion is not executed prior to the first variation game in the transitioning first advantageous rendering state. That is, in the present embodiment, when transitioning from the second specific state to the first specific state, the alert regarding the intrusion is not executed prior to the first game in the transitioning first specific state.

  Similarly, when transitioning from the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state to the special advantageous rendering state, it is not the case that the advantageous rendering state ends and the transition to the normal rendering state is performed, so alerting regarding immersion is performed I will not. In other words, when transitioning from the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state to the special advantageous rendering state, the alert regarding the soaking-in is not executed prior to the first variation game in the transitional special advantageous rendering state.

Next, the flow of effects when the settlement button is operated and the settlement process is performed will be described based on FIGS. 25 (a) and 25 (b).
As shown in FIG. 25A, when the credit is 30 and the bet number is 3, when the settlement button 19 is operated, a settlement process is performed. At this time, if replay is not given, the "30" medals stored as credits and the "3" medals set as the bet number are paid out, and the settlement is performed. Be done. Along with this, in the effect display device 14, the settlement effect image SG is displayed, and the execution of the settlement effect is started. Further, after the execution of the settlement effect, in the effect display device 14, the alerting image GTx is displayed, and the alerting regarding the return of the storage medium is started. Furthermore, after the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the standby effect is started.

  While the standby effect is being executed, the alert display image 14 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the alert regarding the intruding is executed. The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to perform volume adjustment by operating the menu button MB during execution of the standby effect. Then, during execution of the standby effect, an effect to be executed by displaying on the effect display device 14 an image GMx including characters (character information) that "you can adjust the volume by pressing the menu button", that is, the menu button MB The effect relating to the operation of is performed after the alert regarding the inset that is executed by displaying the alert image GT3 is performed. That is, during the execution of the standby effect, in the effect display device 14, after the alert regarding the penetration is performed, the effect regarding the operation of the menu button MB is performed. As described above, in the present embodiment, during the execution of the standby effect, the effect executing unit executes an alert regarding the operation of the predetermined operation unit after the alert regarding the inset is performed.

  In FIG. 25 (b), when the alert regarding the immersion is executed by displaying the alert image GT3 during the execution of the waiting effect, the settlement button 19 is operated to execute the settlement process. Shows the flow of presentation when In the case where a warning image GT3 is displayed and a warning regarding depression is being executed, and the credit is 12 and the bet number is 0, the settlement process is performed when the settlement button 19 is operated. . At this time, “12” medals stored as credits are paid out and settled.

  Further, when the settlement button 19 is operated and the settlement process is performed, the display of the alerting image GT3 on the effect display device 14 is ended, and the execution of the alerting regarding the immersion is ended. That is, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the depression is being executed, the execution of the alerting for the depression ends. Furthermore, with the settlement process being performed, the settlement display image SG is displayed in the effect display device 14, and execution of the settlement presentation is started. Further, after the execution of the settlement effect, in the effect display device 14, the alerting image GTx is displayed, and the alerting regarding the return of the storage medium is started. That is, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the warning about the depression is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the warning about the depression is finished, and the warning about the return of the storage medium is executed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended in the effect executing means, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium The awakening is performed. Incidentally, after the execution of the warning about the return of the storage medium, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the standby effect is started. While the standby effect is being executed, the alerting image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and an alert regarding the inset is executed.

Although FIG. 25 (b) exemplifies the case where the settlement button 19 is operated during the execution of the alerting regarding the indentation performed by displaying the alerting image GT3, the alerting image GT3 is embedded. Not only during the execution of the alert on For example, when the settlement button 19 is operated even when a warning regarding depression is being executed by displaying any of the warning images TGa to TGf, the execution of the warning regarding depression is ended. . Then, after the execution of the alerting on the inset is finished, the alerting on the return of the storage medium is executed.

  Next, based on FIG. 26 (a) and FIG. 26 (b), the flow of effects when the settlement button is operated after winning a bell combination as a payout, and the case where the settlement button is operated after replay The flow of the production of and will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 26A, when the bell combination is won, ten medals are awarded as a prize, and the credit increases. At this time, it is assumed that the credit after the increase is "26". Thereafter, before the bet number is set, that is, when the bet number is “0”, when the settlement button 19 is operated, the settlement process is executed. At this time, "26" medals stored as credits are paid out and settled. Along with this, in the effect display device 14, the settlement effect image SG is displayed, and the execution of the settlement effect is started. Further, after the execution of the settlement effect, in the effect display device 14, the alerting image GTx is displayed, and the alerting regarding the return of the storage medium is started. Furthermore, after the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the standby effect is started. Further, during the standby effect, the alerting image GT3 is displayed, and the alerting regarding the inset is executed. As described above, when the settlement button 19 is operated after the bell combination is won in the variation game, the settlement processing is performed, and the execution of the standby effect is started, and the alert regarding the inset is performed during the execution of the standby effect. To be executed. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated after the payout is won in the game, the settlement control is performed, and the execution of the standby effect is started, and the attention on the embedding during the execution of the standby effect The awakening is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 26 (b), when the re-play combination is won, the medal is not awarded, but the bet number is set by the re-play. At this time, it is assumed that "3" is set as the bet number. Thereafter, if the settlement button 19 is operated before the start lever 20 is operated, the settlement process is performed. At this time, when the credit is “16”, “16” medals stored as the credit are paid out and settled, while “3” is kept set as the bet number. Further, along with this, in the effect display device 14, the adjustment effect image SG is displayed, and the execution of the adjustment effect is started. Further, after the execution of the settlement effect, in the effect display device 14, the alerting image GTx is displayed, and the alerting regarding the return of the storage medium is started. However, after the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium, the execution of the waiting effect is not started. At this time, for example, when the effect display device 14 is being controlled to the normal effect state, the background image in the normal effect state is displayed. As described above, when the settlement button 19 is operated after the re-play combination is won in the variation game, while the settlement process is performed, the execution of the waiting effect is not started. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated after the replay player combination is won in the game, while the settlement control is performed, the execution of the standby effect is not started.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, when the settlement button 19 is operated after the player's winning combination is won, while the settlement processing is performed, the execution of the standby effect is not started, and the settlement button is performed after the bell combination is won. When 19 is operated, the settlement process is performed, and the execution of the standby effect is started, and a warning regarding the inset is performed during the execution of the standby effect. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated after the player has won the prize, the execution of the standby effect is not started while the settlement operation means is performed after the payout combination is won. When the operation is performed, the settlement control is performed, and the execution of the standby effect is started, and a warning about the inset is performed during the execution of the standby effect.

Further, in the slot machine 10, in any of the case where the settlement button 19 is operated after the re-playing combination is won in the variation game and the case where the settlement button 19 is operated after the payout combination is won in the variation game. In the effect display device 14, the settlement effect is executed. That is, in the present embodiment, in either of the case where the settlement operating means is operated after the replay player is won in the game and the case where the settlement operation means is operated after the payout combination is won in the game, In the execution means, a settlement effect relating to the settlement of gaming media is performed.

The slot machine 10 of this embodiment has the following effects.
(1) The stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus gaming state (special state) which is generated after the bonus stop (the special display result) is derived, and the execution of the stagnation control is started. After that, a warning about depression is performed. As described above, after executing the stagnation control and temporarily interrupting the play after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state, the alert regarding the immersion is executed to effectively execute the alert regarding the immersion. be able to. Further, after the final game in the bonus gaming state, the alert regarding the stagnation is executed, so it is possible to suppress the stagnation after the bonus gaming state is ended.

  In particular, in a slot machine, even during the execution of a presentation, the presentation in progress is often interrupted, for example, by inserting a medal or operating the start lever. In such a slot machine, the play can be interrupted by performing specific control of stagnation control, so that even the slot machine can effectively execute the alerting for the depression.

  (2) The bonus game is performed when the termination condition of the advantage period is established by the occurrence of the bonus gaming state (special condition), and when the termination condition of the advantage period is not established by the occurrence of the bonus gaming state. We changed the aspect of the alert about the depression that is executed after the execution of stagnation control is started after the last fluctuation game (game) in the state. This makes it possible to grasp whether the termination condition of the advantageous period is established by the occurrence of the bonus gaming state, from the aspect of alerting regarding immersion. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in alerting regarding depression, and to implement alerting regarding depression effectively.

  (3) By the stagnation control being executed after the last variation game (game) in the bonus gaming state (special status), the effect state (special effect mode) to be controlled after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state Control is stagnated. As a result, during execution of stagnation control, the player's interest shifts to the next effect state by being controlled to the effect state controlled after the end of the bonus game state, and the interest in alerting regarding stagnation drops It is possible to suppress such an event.

  (4) When stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus gaming state (special status), a specific image (for example, the image 60 or 61) displayed after the final variation game Continues to be displayed without movement, and the movement of the particular image is stagnated. For example, if a particular image is activated while a warning about depression is being performed, there is a risk that the player's interest may shift to the particular image, but the particular image may continue to be displayed without operating. By doing this, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in alerting regarding depression.

(5) In the game arcade, for example, a slot machine (a game machine in which the first game medium is used as a game medium) in which medals are used as game media, and a pachinko game machine (a game machine in which game balls are used as game media) There is a game arcade where a second gaming medium is used as a gaming medium) and the like. In such a game arcade, one player may enjoy (play) a fluctuation game on a slot machine, or may play a fluctuation game on a pachinko gaming machine. Therefore, in addition to the alert about the intruding into the variation game (game) in the slot machine, the content of the alert regarding the intruding was taken as the content including the alert about the intruding into the variation game with the pachinko gaming machine. As a result, in addition to alerting the player who plays in the slot machine to the embedded game into the variation game in the slot machine, it is possible to execute the alert on the embedded game into the floating game in the pachinko gaming machine, effectively It is possible to carry out a warning about the entanglement.

  (6) The stagnation control is executed after the final variation game (game) in the advantageous rendering state (specific state) in which the bell navigation effect as a guidance effect for guiding the operation capable of acquiring a profit is executed, and the execution of the stagnation control An attention alert is performed after the start of the As described above, after executing the stagnation control and temporarily interrupting the play after the final game in the advantageous rendering state, by executing the alert regarding the immersion, the alert regarding the immersion is effectively executed. Can. Further, after the final game in the advantageous rendering state, the alert regarding the immersion is executed, so that it is possible to suppress the immersion after the advantageous rendering state ends.

  (7) The case where the number of times of favorable stay is "0" without the advantageous upper limit being less than "100" corresponds to the case where the first ending condition is satisfied among the ending conditions of the advantageous rendering state (specific state) Do. Moreover, when the advantageous upper limit becomes less than "100" and the advantageous upper limit becomes "0" or the number of times of the advantageous stay becomes "0", the second termination condition among the termination conditions of the advantageous rendering state Corresponds to the case where Then, when the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous rendering state ends, and when the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous rendering state ends, and the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state (specific state) (Game) After the execution of stagnation control was started after the execution of stagnation control was different in the mode of alerting regarding depression. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp from the aspect of alerting regarding the inset as to whether any one of the first end condition and the second end condition is satisfied and the advantageous rendering state is ended. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in alerting regarding depression, and to implement alerting regarding depression effectively.

  (8) By performing stagnation control after the last variation game (game) in the advantageous rendering state (specific state), to a rendering state (specific rendering mode) to be controlled after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state Control is stagnated. As a result, during execution of stagnation control, the player's interest shifts to the next effect state by being controlled to the effect state controlled after the end of the advantageous effect state, and the interest in alerting regarding the stagnation decreases. It is possible to suppress such an event.

  (9) When stagnation control is executed after the final fluctuation game (playing) in the advantageous rendering state (specific state), a specific image displayed after the final fluctuation game (for example, the specific winning number image GBc) Continues to be displayed without movement, and the movement of the particular image is stagnated. For example, if a particular image is activated while a warning about depression is being performed, there is a risk that the player's interest may shift to the particular image, but the particular image may continue to be displayed without operating. By doing this, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in alerting regarding depression.

(10) When the bet number (the bet number) is set within a specific period, the last variation game in the bonus game state (special state) is continued (the game is executed in the bonus game state (special state) in order to continue being executed without warning ) After the start of the execution of the alert regarding the inset, the alert on the inset can be performed at least within a specific period. For this reason, compared to the case in which the betting number is set regardless of the period after the attention alert is performed, the attention regarding the immersion is executed effectively. be able to.

  In addition, if it is assumed that the bet number is set after a specific period since the start of the execution of the attention warning after the last variation game in the bonus gaming state, the alert about the insertion until the bet number is set after the specific period Is executed, and the betting number is set after the specific period, and the warning about the inset ends. For this reason, after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state, even if the bet number is not set within a specific period, a warning regarding embarrassing may be executed until the bet number is set after the specific period. It is possible to effectively carry out the warning about the enthusiasm.

  (11) The stagnation control is executed and the play alerting is executed after the play is temporarily stagnated, so that it becomes easy to pay attention to the alert concerning the stagnation. In addition, the specific period is made longer than the execution period in which stagnation control is executed after the last variation game (game) in the bonus game state (special state). As a result, for example, even if a player who is low in interest in alerting regarding stagnation sets the number of bets (number of bets) immediately after termination of stagnation control, etc., alerting regarding swallowing is ended within a specific period. Continue to run without. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the end of the alert regarding the inset, and to increase the interest in the alert on the inset. As a result, for the player who is not interested in the alert regarding the intruding, the alert regarding the intruding can be executed effectively.

  (12) When the bet number (the bet number) is set within a specific period, the last variation game in the advantageous rendering state (specific state) (game (game ) After the start of the execution of the alert regarding the inset, the alert on the inset can be performed at least within a specific period. For this reason, compared to the case in which the betting number is set regardless of the period after the attention alert is performed, the attention regarding the immersion is executed effectively. be able to.

  In addition, if it is assumed that the bet number is set after a specific period since the start of the execution of the alert regarding the inset after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state, the alert regarding the sorrow until the bet number is set after the specific period Is executed, and the betting number is set after the specific period, and the warning about the inset ends. For this reason, after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state, even if the bet number is not set within the specific period, a caution regarding the inlaying may be executed until the bet number is set after the specific period. It is possible to effectively carry out the warning about the enthusiasm.

  (13) The stagnation control is executed and the play alert is executed after the play is temporarily stagnated, so that it becomes easy to pay attention to the alert regarding the stagnation. In addition, the specific period is made longer than the execution period in which stagnation control is performed after the final variation game (game) in the advantageous rendering state (specific state). As a result, for example, even if a player who is low in interest in alerting regarding stagnation sets the number of bets (number of bets) immediately after termination of stagnation control, etc., alerting regarding swallowing is ended within a specific period. Continue to run without. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the end of the alert regarding the inset, and to increase the interest in the alert on the inset. As a result, for the player who is not interested in the alert regarding the intruding, the alert regarding the intruding can be executed effectively.

(14) In the bonus game state (special state), the first bonus game state (first special state), the second bonus game state (first special state), and the single bonus game state (second special state) There is. Among the above, when the first bonus gaming state (or the second bonus gaming state) having a larger number of obtainable medals (the number of game media) is generated compared to the single bonus gaming state, it relates to the stagnation. A reminder is executed. On the other hand, when a single bonus gaming state in which the number of medals that can be acquired is smaller than that in the first bonus gaming state (or the second bonus gaming state) is generated, the alert regarding the entanglement is not executed. did. As described above, there is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable even if the warning about the entanglement is executed when the single bonus gaming state in which the number of obtainable medals is small is generated. Therefore, when the single bonus gaming state is generated, it is possible to suppress the player from feeling uncomfortable by not executing the alerting regarding the stagnation.

  In addition, since the number of medals that can be acquired in the single bonus gaming state is small, it is considered that the number of medals that the player can acquire is small even if the single bonus gaming state is triggered, and the effect of alerting regarding immersion is weak. Be On the other hand, since the number of medals that can be acquired is large in the first bonus gaming state (or the second bonus gaming state), it is considered that the number of medals obtained by the player is large, and the effect of alerting regarding immersion is strong. . And in the situation where the effect of the alerting about the depression is considered to be weak, the alerting on the depression is not executed, and in the situation where the effect of the alerting on the immersion is considered strong, the alerting about the depression is executed. This makes it possible to strengthen the effect of the alert regarding the inset and execute the alert regarding the inset effectively, as compared with the case where the alert regarding the inset is always executed when the bonus gaming state is simply generated. it can.

  (15) While the number of variation games (games) in the single bonus gaming state (second special state) is one, the first bonus gaming state (first special state) and the second bonus gaming state (first special state) The number of fluctuation games in) is more than once. As described above, since the number of change games in the single bonus gaming state is one, it is also conceivable that the player does not notice that the single bonus gaming state has been generated. In such a situation, when the alert regarding the depression is performed, the reason why the alert on the depression is performed can not be understood, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. By not executing the alerting on the inset in such a situation, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of discomfort due to the execution of the alert on the inset.

  (16) Among the first bonus gaming state (first special status), the second bonus gaming state (first special status), and the single bonus gaming state (second special status), the final variation in the first bonus gaming state After the end of the game (game), and after the end of the last variable game in the second bonus game state, a warning regarding the entanglement is executed. In this way, after having finished enjoying the first bonus gaming state and the second bonus gaming state, that is, after acquiring the medals (gaming media) by the occurrence of the first bonus gaming state and the second bonus gaming state, a caution regarding the stagnation By performing awakening, it is possible to enhance the effect of alerting regarding depression.

  (17) When transitioning from the first advantageous effect state (first specific state) to the second advantageous effect state (second specific state), prior to the first variation game (game) in the second advantageous effect state to be transitioned No attention is given to the attention. On the other hand, when transitioning from the first advantageous rendering state to the normal rendering state (normal state), a warning regarding the entanglement is executed prior to the first variation game in the transitioning normal rendering state. As described above, when transitioning from the first advantageous rendering state to the normal rendering state, the alert regarding the immersion is executed, so that the transition to the normal rendering state can be divided while preventing the embedding. , Can be alerted about the embedded without discomfort.

  In addition, the situation in which the first advantageous rendering state transitions to the second advantageous rendering state that is advantageous over the first advantageous rendering state improves the interest of the player against transitioning to the second advantageous rendering state. It is also a situation that For this reason, by not performing the alerting regarding the depression, it is possible to suppress that it becomes difficult to improve the interest by executing the alerting regarding the depression.

  (18) When transitioning from the second advantageous effect state (second specific state) to the first advantageous effect state (first specific state), prior to the first variation game (game) in the first advantageous effect state to be transitioned No attention is given to the attention. In this way, when transitioning in the advantageous rendering state (specific state), since it is continued as the advantageous rendering state, if alerting regarding immersion is carried out along with the transition, a series of advantageous rendering states will be sufficient. There is a risk that it can not be entertained. Therefore, in the advantageous rendering state, in any of the transition from the first advantageous rendering state to the second advantageous rendering state and the transition from the second advantageous rendering state to the first advantageous rendering state, it relates to stagnation. Don't execute alerting. This makes it possible to suppress such a situation that the series of advantageous rendering states can not be sufficiently entertained by executing the alerting regarding the inset.

  (19) When transitioning from the first advantageous rendering state (the first specific state) to the normal rendering state (the normal state), the execution of stagnation control is started after the last variation game (game) in the first advantageous rendering state A warning regarding the inset is to be executed later, and after the execution of the alert on the inset is started, the transition to the normal rendering state is made. In this manner, attention control regarding stagnation is performed after execution of the stagnation control is performed and the play is temporarily stagnated, so that attention regarding depression is easily noticed. In addition, since the transition to the normal rendering state is started after execution of the alerting regarding the entanglement is started, the play is temporarily stagnated when the advantageous rendering state (specific state) ends and the transition to the normal rendering state occurs. The player can also be calmed down, and the alert regarding the embarrassing can be performed effectively.

  (20) In the effect display device 14 (representation execution means) in which the attention about the entanglement is executed when the attention regarding the entanglement is executed, the appearance effect (specific effect) or the starry sky effect (specific effect) is executed Be done. Since the appearance effect and the starry sky effect are effects for indicating or notifying an advantage regarding the occurrence of an advantageous state such as a bonus gaming state or an advantageous effect state, the player has high interest. In this way, by performing an effect (specific effect) in which the player's interest is high when attention is drawn to attention, attention is paid to attention not only to appearance effect or starry sky effect, but to attention And can be effectively alerting about intrusiveness.

  (21) A starry sky effect (specific effect) is an effect that suggests or notifies an internal mode (internal control state). By performing such a starry sky presentation and attention warning, it is easy to attract the attention of the player who is focused on what kind of internal mode is, and it is effective for the attention warning regarding such a player. Can be Then, for example, a player who has predicted or specified the internal mode can effectively recognize that he should be careful about the inset.

(22) Depending on the internal mode (internal control state), the determination rate of the upper limit number of times (the number of ceilings) of the number of games required until the next advantageous state occurs is different. For this reason, the starry sky effect (specific effect) is an effect that suggests or notifies the upper limit number of game times required until the advantageous state is generated next. By performing such a starry sky effect and alerting regarding the inset, it is easy to attract the attention of the player who pays attention to the upper limit number of times of the game required until the advantageous state is generated next, to such a player It is possible to effectively carry out the warning about the burn-in. Then, for example, it is possible to effectively recognize that the player who has predicted or specified the upper limit number of games required until the next advantageous state is generated should be careful about the inscription.

  (23) Appearance effect (specific effect) is an effect that suggests or notifies a setting value. It is easy to attract the attention of the player who pays attention to what setting value is set by executing the alert about the appearance effect and the obscuration, and such a distraction alert to the player It can be implemented effectively. Then, for example, the player who has predicted or specified the set value can effectively recognize that he should be careful about the inset.

  (24) In addition to the execution of the alert regarding the entanglement, the appearance rendition and the starry sky rendition are executed, which causes the player to be bored by the alert regarding the many times of immersion being executed. Can be suppressed.

  (25) There are many cases where a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the game arcade. And when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number (the bet number) is 1 or more, the situation where the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated shifts to the play on another gaming machine It may be a situation. Therefore, when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 1 or more, the execution of the standby effect is started, and the attention on the embedding during the execution of the standby effect The awakening was performed. In this way, it is possible to execute alerting regarding the stagnation to the player who shifts to play on another gaming machine, so it is not limited to the gaming machine that was playing, but is embedded in the gaming machine to be played next Can also be alerted, and can be effectively alerted about intrusiveness.

  (26) A situation in which the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated when the number of credits is 1 or more and the number of bets (number of bets) is 0 shifts to play on another gaming machine It may be a situation. Therefore, when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 1 or more, the execution of the standby effect is started, and the attention on the embedding during the execution of the standby effect The awakening was performed. In this way, it is possible to execute alerting regarding the stagnation to the player who shifts to play on another gaming machine, so it is not limited to the gaming machine that was playing, but is embedded in the gaming machine to be played next Can also be alerted, and can be effectively alerted about intrusiveness.

  (27) The situation where the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated when the credit is 0 and the bet number (the number of bets) is 1 or more shifts to the play on another gaming machine It may be a situation. Therefore, when the settlement button 19 is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number is 1 or more, the execution of the standby effect is started, and the attention on the embedding during the execution of the standby effect The awakening was performed. In this way, it is possible to execute alerting regarding the stagnation to the player who shifts to play on another gaming machine, so it is not limited to the gaming machine that was playing, but is embedded in the gaming machine to be played next Can also be alerted, and can be effectively alerted about intrusiveness.

(28) If the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated when the credit is 1 or more and the bet number (the bet number) is 1 or more, the effect display device 14 (effect execution means) The settlement effect relating to the settlement of the game medium is executed prior to the standby effect. For example, when the settlement effect is executed after the standby effect is executed after the settlement button 19 is operated, the time from the operation of the settlement button 19 to the execution of the settlement effect becomes longer, and the settlement button 19 is There is a risk that the player may not feel that the player has been operated, or may give the player an uncomfortable feeling. However, when the settlement button 19 is operated, it is possible to suppress an uncomfortable feeling by performing the settlement effect before the standby effect.

  Further, prior to the warning about the return of the storage medium such as the prepaid card, the effect display device 14 executes the settlement effect on the settlement of the game medium. By executing such a settlement effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the medals have been settled by operating the settlement button 19.

  (29) Since there is a risk that the player who ends the play forgets to take out the storage medium such as the prepaid card, the warning regarding the return of the storage medium is executed after the settlement effect. As a result, not only the warning about the entanglement but also the warning about the return of the storage medium can contribute to the suppression of the omission of the storage medium.

  In addition, by performing the alerting on the return of the storage medium before the standby effect, storage is performed more effectively than in the case where the alert on the return of the storage medium is executed after the standby effect. It is possible to suppress the omission of the medium.

  (30) The number of bets (number of bets) will be set if a replay is awarded when a replay combination is won, but since it is not a target of the settlement, the settlement process (settlement control) was performed However, the bet amount remains set. If the standby effect is executed under such a situation, there is a possibility that the play may be ended without the variation game being executed, although the variation game (game) can be executed. Therefore, by not executing the standby effect when the replay player wins, it is possible to suppress the end of the play even though the variation game can be executed.

  (31) In many cases, a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the game arcade. And, the situation where the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated may be the situation of shifting to the play on another gaming machine. Therefore, when the settlement button 19 is operated after the payout combination is won, the execution of the standby effect is started, and the alert regarding the embedding is performed during the execution of the standby effect. In this way, it is possible to execute alerting regarding the stagnation to the player who shifts to play on another gaming machine, so it is not limited to the gaming machine that was playing, but is embedded in the gaming machine to be played next Can also be alerted, so that it is possible to execute alerting regarding the inset effectively. However, the number of bets (number of bets) will be set if a replay is awarded if a remake is won, but it is not a target of the settlement, so it is assumed that the settlement processing (settlement control) has been performed. Also, the number of bets remains set. If the standby effect is executed under such a situation, there is a possibility that the play may be ended without the variation game being executed, although the variation game (game) can be executed. Therefore, by not executing the standby effect when the replay player wins, it is possible to suppress the end of the play even though the variation game can be executed.

  (32) The case where the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated after the re-playing combination is won in the variation game (game), and the case where the settlement button 19 is operated after the payout combination is won in the variation game, In any of the above, in the effect display device 14 (effect execution means), the adjustment effect relating to the adjustment of the game medium is executed. By executing such a settlement effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that the settlement of the game medium has been performed by operating the settlement button 19.

  (33) When the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated after the payout is won in the variation game (game), the effect display device 14 (representation execution means) settles the game medium before the standby effect. Settlement effect is executed. For example, when the settlement effect is executed after the standby effect is executed after the settlement button 19 is operated, the time from the operation of the settlement button 19 to the execution of the settlement effect becomes longer, and the settlement button 19 is There is a risk that the player may not feel that the player has been operated, or may give the player an uncomfortable feeling. However, when the settlement button 19 is operated, it is possible to suppress an uncomfortable feeling by performing the settlement effect before the standby effect.

  (34) It is possible to prevent swallowing by executing a reminder about the swallowing. Then, when the settlement button 19 (settlement operation means) is operated during the execution of the alert regarding the inset, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is completed, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is executed. By the way, there are many cases where a plurality of gaming machines are installed in the game arcade. Then, the situation in which the settlement button 19 is operated may be a situation in which the game shifts to play on another gaming machine. Then, when the settlement button 19 is operated during the execution of the alert regarding the inset, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended, and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium is performed. In this way, the player who terminates the play forgets to take out the storage medium by executing the reminder on the return of the storage medium such as the prepaid card while suppressing the stagnation by executing the reminder on the insertion. Something can be suppressed. As described above, even in the case where the caution button on the settlement button 19 is operated, the alert button 19 is operated on the occasion where the caution button on the settlement button 19 is operated. It is possible to effectively execute the alerting on the inset and the alerting on the return of the storage medium, respectively.

  (35) While the waiting effect is being performed, a warning regarding intruding is performed. When the standby effect is being executed, there is also a possibility that the player who starts the play is visually recognizing the standby effect. By performing the alerting on the inset during the execution of such standby effects, it is possible to execute an alert on the inset to the player who is about to start playing.

  (36) If the alert regarding the inset is being performed while the standby effect is being performed, the execution of the alert on the inset will end if the menu button MB as a predetermined operation means is operated. For this reason, during the execution of the standby effect, after the alert regarding the inset is performed, the effect regarding the operation of the menu button MB is performed. As a result, it is possible to suppress a situation in which the execution of the alerting regarding the ingestion is ended by the operation of the menu button MB.

  (37) If the menu button MB as a predetermined operation means is operated during the execution of the standby effect, the execution of the standby effect also ends. For this reason, during the execution of the standby effect, after the alert regarding the stagnation is executed, the effect regarding the operation of the menu button MB is executed, so that the standby effect is executed for a long time and the game is executed by the standby effect. The period for entertaining the person can be extended, and the execution of the waiting effect makes it easy to improve the interest.

  (38) Since the volume can be adjusted by operating the menu button MB as a predetermined operation means, the variation game (game) is performed after the menu button MB is operated during the execution of the standby effect to adjust the volume. Can be performed. That is, since it is possible to play at a volume that suits the player's own preference, it is possible to effectively improve the interest.

(39) In the effect related to the operation of the menu button MB as the predetermined operation means, it is informed that the volume and the adjustment are possible by operating the menu button MB. For this reason, since the player who does not want to adjust the volume does not operate the menu button MB, it can be suppressed that the menu button MB is operated unnecessarily even though he is not willing to adjust the volume. . That is, it is possible to effectively suppress the end of the execution of the alert regarding the inset by the menu button MB being operated when the alert for the inset is being executed.

  (40) In the case where the content of the alerting regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect and the content of the alerting regarding the immersion performed after the final variation game (special game) in the bonus gaming state (special status) are different, There is a risk that misidentification may occur, such as alerting different events. However, by making the content of the alert about the obscuration performed during the execution of the standby effect the same as the content of the alert regarding the obscuration performed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state, it is common. It is possible to execute the alerting regarding the obsessiveness and to suppress the false recognition of the alerting.

  (41) In the case where the content of the alerting regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect and the content of the alerting regarding the immersion performed after the final variation game (game) in the advantageous rendering state (specific state) are different, There is a risk that misidentification may occur, such as alerting different events. However, by making the content of the alert about the enthusiasm performed during the execution of the standby effect the same as the content of the alert for the enthusiasm to be executed after the final variation game in the advantageous effect state, it is common. It is possible to execute the alerting regarding the obsessiveness and to suppress the false recognition of the alerting.

  (42) The contents of the alert about the entanglement to be executed after the last variation game (game) in the advantageous production state (specific state) is the final variation game during the execution of the standby effect or in the bonus gaming state (special state) If the content is different from the content of the alert regarding the depression performed later, there is a possibility that a misidentification may occur such as each alerting a different event. However, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed after the last variation game in the advantageous rendering state is executed after the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby presentation and the final variation game in the bonus game The content is the same as the content of the alert regarding the attention. In this way, it is possible to execute a common alert regarding depression, and to suppress false recognition of the alert.

  (43) After the pay-out prize is won in the final variation game (special game state) in the bonus game state (special state), after the alert regarding the inset is executed, the alert on the inset until at least a specified time has elapsed Can be effectively executed after the end of the bonus gaming state. In addition, it is also conceivable to temporarily suspend play after the end of the bonus gaming state, but when a predetermined waiting time elapses without the bet number (number of bets) being set, a warning concerning the stagnation is executed. To be executed. As a result, even for the player whose play has been temporarily interrupted after the end of the bonus game state, a warning regarding the stagnation in the waiting effect can be executed, and a warning concerning the stagnation can be executed effectively.

(44) After the pay-out prize is won in the final variation game (game) in the advantageous production state (specific state), after the pay-out attention is executed, at least until the specific time elapses Can be executed effectively, so that the warning about the inset can be effectively executed after the advantageous rendering state ends. In addition, it is conceivable to temporarily suspend play after the end of the advantageous rendering state, but when the predetermined waiting time elapses without the bet number (number of bets) being set, the alert concerning the stagnation is executed. To be executed. As a result, even for the player whose play has been temporarily interrupted after the end of the advantageous rendering state, the alert regarding the immersion in the standby effect can be executed, and the alert regarding the immersion can be executed effectively.

  (45) In the case where the replay player has won a prize in the final variation game (game) in the advantageous rendering state (specific state), the alert regarding the entanglement after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state is executed After that, the alert regarding the depression is continuously performed at least until a specific time has passed. On the other hand, the standby effect is not executed even if the predetermined standby time elapses thereafter. By the way, if a replay is awarded and a replay is awarded, the number of bets (the number of bets) will be set, and it becomes possible to make a fluctuation game possible. If the standby effect is executed in such a situation, there is a possibility that the situation may seem as if the fluctuation game can not be executed even though the fluctuation game can be executed. is there. For this reason, after the replay player has won a prize in the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state, even if the predetermined standby time has elapsed, the standby presentation is not performed, and the situation where the variation game can be executed is voluntarily It is possible to suppress something that seems to have ended.

  (46) The manner of the alerting regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect is different from the manner of the alerting regarding the immersion performed after the final variation game (special game) in the bonus gaming state (special state). Thereby, during the execution of the standby effect and according to each situation after the end of the bonus gaming state, it is possible to effectively execute the alerting regarding the embedding and suppress the embedding.

  (47) The aspect of the alerting related to immersion performed during execution of the standby effect is different from the aspect of the alerting related to embedding performed after the final variation game (game) in the advantageous rendering state (specific state). Thereby, during the execution of the standby effect and in accordance with the respective situations after the end of the advantageous effect state, it is possible to effectively execute the alert regarding the immersion and suppress the intrusion.

  (48) The alerting mode regarding the immersion performed after the final variation game (game) in the bonus game status (special status) is executed after the final variation game (game) in the advantageous rendering status (specific status) This is different from the alerting mode regarding the burn-in. Thereby, according to each situation after the end of the bonus game state and the end of the advantageous effect state, the alert regarding the embedding can be executed effectively, and the embedding can be suppressed.

  (49) In a gaming machine adopting a transmissive display as the effect display device 14, a predetermined alerting image (for example, alerting image TGa) is displayed in a display area other than the transmissive area 14a (reel visual recognition area) A reminder about the entanglement is performed. As described above, since a predetermined alerting image is displayed in a display area other than the transmissive area 14a, it is possible to suppress an uncomfortable feeling due to the alerting about the intruding being disturbed. Furthermore, it becomes easy to shift the line of sight of the player viewing the reel to the predetermined alerting image with respect to the reel, and by changing the line of sight, the attention to the predetermined alerting image can also be enhanced. Can be performed effectively.

(50) When the predetermined effect area in which the alert regarding the inset is performed and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 corresponding to the specific movable body overlap, the movable heart when the alert regarding the inset is performed When the body 25 operates, there is a possibility that the alert regarding the inset can not be visually recognized, and the alert on the sufficient inset can not be executed. Therefore, the predetermined effect area in which the alert about the entanglement is performed and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 do not overlap. As a result, it is possible to suppress that the alert on the inset can not be sufficiently performed due to the movement of the heart movable body 25 so that the alert on the inset can not be viewed sufficiently, and the alert on the inset is effectively executed. be able to.

  (51) In front view, the width of the predetermined alerting image (for example, the alerting image TGa) is longer than the width of one of the plurality of reels 13a to 13c. As a result, the line of sight can be more easily directed to a predetermined alerting image than the reels, and the alert regarding the inset can be effectively executed.

  (52) The backlight BL is turned off by performing the special visual recognition control, which makes it difficult to visually recognize the reels 13a to 13c. As described above, by making the reels 13a to 13c difficult to visually recognize by performing the special visual identification control, the line of sight of the player can be easily shifted to a predetermined alerting image, and the alert regarding the immersion is effectively executed. Can.

  (53) By performing special visual recognition control, an image of one color is displayed in the transmissive area 14a (reel visual recognition area), and it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the reels 13a to 13c. As described above, by making the reels 13a to 13c difficult to visually recognize by performing the special visual identification control, the line of sight of the player can be easily shifted to a predetermined alerting image, and the alert regarding the immersion is effectively executed. Can.

  (54) After the final variation game (game) in the bonus gaming state (special state), the predetermined effect area in which the alert regarding the immersion is executed is the first special winning number effect (special gain number effect) or the first [2] When overlapping with the area in which the special acquisition number effect (special acquisition number effect) is executed, there is a possibility that a warning regarding the simmering can not be sufficiently executed. Therefore, after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state, the predetermined effect area where the alert regarding the entanglement is executed and the area where the first special gain number effect and the second special effect number effect are performed do not overlap. did. As a result, it is possible to suppress the possibility of not being able to execute the alerting regarding the simmering sufficiently without being able to visually recognize the alerting relating to the squeezing by executing the first special acquisition number effect and the second special acquiring number effect. It is possible to effectively carry out the alerting regarding the depression.

  (55) After the final variation game (game) in the advantageous rendering state (specific state), if the predetermined rendering area in which the alert regarding the immersion is executed overlaps the area in which the specific winning number rendering is performed, sufficient There is a possibility that the alert about the entanglement can not be performed. Therefore, after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state, the predetermined rendering area in which the alert regarding the entanglement is executed and the area in which the specific acquisition number rendering is performed are not overlapped. In this way, it is possible to suppress the inability to perform alerting regarding the ingestion sufficiently by not being able to visually recognize the alert regarding the ingestion by execution of the specific acquisition number effect, and effectively performing the alerting regarding the intruding can do.

Second Embodiment
Next, a second embodiment of the gaming machine will be described. The same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and the detailed description and the drawings will be omitted.

In the first embodiment, the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the alert regarding the stagnation is executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, stagnation control is performed prior to the start of the first variation game in the bonus gaming state, and after execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is executed. Further, in the first embodiment, stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding depression is executed. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, stagnation control is executed prior to the start of the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state, and after execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is executed.

  Further, in the first embodiment, when transitioning from the preparation effect state to the advantageous effect state, the transition is made to the first advantageous effect state. On the other hand, in the second embodiment, in the case of transition from the preparation effect state to the advantageous effect state, transition is made to the advantageous effect state determined by lottery among the first advantageous effect state and the second advantageous effect state.

  Specifically, in the second embodiment, when the main control CPU 40a stores the advantageous shift allowance information in the main control RAM 40c, the types of the advantageous rendering state at the start of the advantageous rendering state are the first advantageous rendering state and the second advantageous rendering state. Determined by lottery from among the state of advantageous production. When the main control CPU 40a determines the type of the advantageous rendering state at the start of the advantageous rendering state, the main control CPU 40a can identify the type of the determined advantageous rendering state (hereinafter referred to as start type advantageous type information). It is stored in the main control RAM 40c.

  Further, in the effect state transition process, when the promotion replay player combination is won when the main effect control CPU 40a is in the preparation effect state, the effect state flag of the effect state flag is stored according to the start time advantageous type information stored in the main control RAM 40c. Update the value Specifically, when it is possible to specify the first advantageous rendering state from the start time advantageous type information, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first advantageous rendering state in the rendering state flag. On the other hand, when the second advantageous rendering state can be specified from the start time advantageous type information, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the second advantageous rendering state in the effect state flag. Note that, at this time, the main control CPU 40a has the remaining advantages, even when setting either the value capable of specifying the first advantageous rendering state or the value capable of identifying the second advantageous rendering state as the rendering state flag. "30 times" is stored in the main control RAM 40c as the number of stays. The main control CPU 40a stores "10 times" in the main control RAM 40c as the second advantageous stay number only when setting a value capable of specifying the second advantageous effect state in the effect state flag.

Here, the special stagnation process in the second embodiment will be described based on FIG.
In the specific stagnation process of the second embodiment, the main control CPU 40a determines whether the first bonus effect state starts (step S301). In step S301, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the first bonus combination is won in the end process (step S122) and a value capable of specifying the first bonus effect state is set in the effect state flag. Determining that the first bonus effect state starts in step S301 corresponds to determining that the first bonus game state is started before the first variation game starts.

  When the first bonus effect state starts (step S301: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the first stagnation start command (step S302). In the output process of the first stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer. Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs an opening time measurement process (step S303). In step S303, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined opening time, and stands by until the opening time elapses. Then, when the opening time has elapsed and the measurement process of the opening time is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the first stagnation end command (step S304), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the first stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation end command in the output buffer.

When the first bonus effect state does not start (step S301: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether the second bonus effect state starts (step S305). In step S305, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the second bonus combination is won in the ending process (step S122) and a value capable of specifying the second bonus effect state is set in the effect state flag. Determining that the second bonus effect state starts in step S305 corresponds to determining that it is before the start of the first variation game in the second bonus gaming state.

  When the second bonus effect state starts (step S305: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the second stagnation start command (step S306). In the output process of the second stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer. Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs an opening time measurement process (step S307). In step S307, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined opening time, and stands by until the opening time elapses. Then, when the opening time has elapsed and the measurement process of the opening time is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the second stagnation end command (step S308), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the second stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation end command in the output buffer.

  When the second bonus effect state does not start (step S305: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether the advantageous effect state starts (step S309). In step S309, the main control CPU 40a sets a value capable of specifying the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state as the rendering state flag in the termination process (step S122), triggered by the promotion of the promotion player role being won. Determine if you Determining that the advantageous rendering state starts in step S309 corresponds to determining that it is before the start of the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state.

  When the advantageous rendering state does not start (step S309: NO), the main control CPU 40a ends the special stagnation process. On the other hand, when the advantageous rendering state starts (step S309: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the third stagnation start command (step S310). In the output process of the third stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation start command in the output buffer. The third stagnation start command includes a special third stagnation start command and a non-special third stagnation start command. Then, when the value that can specify the second advantageous rendering state is set as the rendering state flag in the wake of the promotion re-playing winning combination, in step S310, the main control CPU 40a outputs a special third stagnation start command as an output buffer. Store in On the other hand, when a value capable of specifying the first advantageous rendering state is set as the rendering state flag in the wake of the promotion re-playing winning combination, the main control CPU 40a outputs a non-special third stagnation start command in step S310. Store in buffer

  Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs an opening time measurement process (step S311). In step S311, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined opening time, and stands by until the opening time elapses. Then, when the opening time has elapsed and the measurement process of the opening time is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the third stagnation end command (step S312), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the third stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation end command in the output buffer.

In the present embodiment, the processes of steps S302 to S304, the processes of steps S306 to S308, and the processes of steps S310 to S312 correspond to stagnation control. In the following description, “the stagnation control is performed that the processing of step S302 to step S304 is performed, that the processing of step S306 to step S308 is performed, and that the processing of step S310 to step S312 is performed, respectively. Sometimes. In the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs stagnation control by executing one of the processes of steps S302 to S304, the processes of steps S306 to S308, and the processes of steps S310 to S312. A function as a control means is realized. Further, in the present embodiment, among the processing of step S302 to step S304, the processing of step S306 to step S308, and the processing of step S310 to step S312, the processing of step S303, step S307 and step S311 has a predetermined opening time. Control to measure, that is, measurement control of a predetermined opening time is performed.

  Moreover, in the present embodiment, the processing of step S302 to step S304 and the processing of step S306 to step S308 are performed before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state corresponding to the special state is started, It turns out that stagnation control is performed before the first game in a special state is started. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the processing of step S310 to step S312 is performed before the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state corresponding to the specific state is started, so the first game in the specific state is It can be seen that stagnation control is performed prior to being started.

  In the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment, when the stagnation control is executed, the effect display device 14 executes an opening effect. In the slot machine 10, an appearance effect may be performed on the effect display device 14 while the opening effect is being performed.

Next, various opening effects will be described.
The main control CPU 40a performs the processing of step S302 to step S304 of the special stagnation process, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the opening effect of the first bonus effect state . The main control CPU 40a performs the processing of step S304 to step S306 of the special stagnation processing, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the opening effect of the second bonus effect state . The main control CPU 40a performs the processing of steps S310 to S312 of the special stagnation processing, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the opening presentation in the advantageous rendering state.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (a), before the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state is started, the alert display image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the alert regarding the intrusion is executed Ru. In other words, the alert about the entanglement that is executed before the first variation game in the first bonus game state is started is “play that pachinko and pachislot are enjoyed moderately. It is the contents to display the letter of]. Also, be aware of the 'embedo attention' that warns you about the gossip that is executed before the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state is started. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the alert image TGa corresponding to the predetermined alert image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the alert image TGa is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGa is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alerting image TGa is displayed in the display area other than the reel viewable area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the embedding is executed. In addition, the display area in which the alert image TGa is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGa is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting image regarding the inset is executed in the predetermined effect area by displaying the alerting image TGa in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alerting image TGa is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body It does not overlap with the

  In the following description, the opening effect performed before the first variation game in the first bonus game state is started is referred to as a first opening effect. In the first opening effect, the image OP1 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image OP1 "The first bonus game state start! ] Is an image including characters (character information). The image OP1 displayed when the first opening effect is performed continues to be displayed in the effect display device 14 without being operated. That is, when stagnation control is executed before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started, a specific image (for example, the image OP1 displayed before the first variation game is started Continues to be displayed without movement and the movement of the particular image is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is executed before the first game in the special state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the special state is started is It continues to be displayed in motion, and the motion of the particular image is stalled.

  When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears when the first opening effect is performed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 imitating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGa. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (b), before the first variation game in the second bonus gaming state is started, a warning image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14, and a warning regarding the inset is executed. Ru. In other words, the alert about the entanglement that is executed before the first variation game in the second bonus game state is started is “play that pachinko and pachislot are enjoyed moderately. It is the contents to display the letter of]. Also, be aware of the 'embedo attention' that warns you of being carried out before the first variation game in the second bonus gaming state is started. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the alerting image TGc corresponding to the predetermined alerting image is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image TGc is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14 a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGc is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alerting image TGc is displayed in the display area other than the reel viewable area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the embedding is executed. Further, the display area in which the alert image TGc is displayed is an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alerting image TGc is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting regarding the embedding in the predetermined effect area is executed by displaying the alert image TGc in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alerting image TGc is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body It does not overlap with the

In the following description, the opening effect performed before the first variation game in the second bonus gaming state is started is referred to as a second opening effect. In the second opening effect, the image OP2 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image OP2 "The second bonus game state start! ] Is an image including characters (character information). The image OP2 displayed when the second opening effect is performed continues to be displayed in the effect display device 14 without being operated. That is, when stagnation control is performed before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started, a specific image (for example, image OP2) displayed before the first variation game is started Continues to be displayed without movement and the movement of the particular image is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is executed before the first game in the special state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the special state is started is It continues to be displayed in motion, and the motion of the particular image is stalled.

  When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the first character appears when the second opening effect is performed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH1 imitating the first character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH1 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGc. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 28C, before the first variation game in the first advantageous effect state is started, the effect display device 14 displays an alerting image TGe, and an alert regarding intruding is executed. Ru. In other words, the alert about the entanglement that is executed before the first variation game in the 1st advantageous production state is started is "play that pachinko and pachislot are enjoyed moderately. It is the contents to display the letter of]. Also, be aware of the 'striking attention', which is a warning about the soaking that will be performed before the first variation game in the first advantageous rendering state is started. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in the front view, the width of the alert image TGe corresponding to the predetermined alert image is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image TGe is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14 a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGe is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alerting image TGe is displayed in the display area other than the reel viewable area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the embedding is executed. Further, the display area in which the alert image TGe is displayed is an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alerting image TGe is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting image regarding the embedding is performed in the predetermined effect area by displaying the alerting image TGe in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alert image TGe is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body. It does not overlap with the

  In the following description, the opening effect performed before the first variation game in the first advantageous effect state is started is referred to as a third opening effect. In the third opening effect, the image OP3 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image OP3 "The 1st advantageous production state rush! ] Is an image including characters (character information). Note that the image OP3 displayed when the third opening effect is performed continues to be displayed in the effect display device 14 without being operated. That is, when stagnation control is performed before the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is started, the specific image displayed before the first variation game is started (for example, the image OP3 Continues to be displayed without movement and the movement of the particular image is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is executed before the first game in the specific state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the specific state is started is It continues to be displayed in motion, and the motion of the particular image is stalled.

  When the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the second character appears when the third opening effect is performed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH2 imitating the second character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH2 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGe. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 28 (d), before the first variation game in the second advantageous rendering state is started, the rendering display device 14 displays the alerting image TGf, and the alert regarding the inset is executed. Ru. In other words, the alert about the entanglement that is executed prior to the start of the first variation game in the second advantageous production state, "Pachinko Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. It is the contents to display the letter of]. Also, be aware of the 'striking attention', which is a reminder about the predicating that is executed before the first variation game in the second advantageous rendering state is started. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the alert image TGf corresponding to the predetermined alert image is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image TGf is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14 a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alert image TGf is displayed in the display area other than the reel view area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the inset is executed. Further, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed is an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting image relating to immersion is performed in the predetermined effect area by displaying the alerting image TGf in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body It does not overlap with the

  In the following description, the opening effect performed before the first variation game in the second advantageous effect state is started is referred to as a fourth opening effect. In the fourth opening effect, the heart movable body 25 operates. Since the alerting image TGf is displayed in a region not overlapping the operation region of the heart movable body 25, the heart movable body 25 and the alerting image TGf are displayed in front view even when the heart movable body 25 operates. Does not suffer.

  In the fourth opening effect, the image OP4 is displayed on the effect display device 14. The image OP4 shows "2nd advantageous production state rush! ] Is an image including characters (character information). The image OP4 displayed when the fourth opening effect is performed continues to be displayed in the effect display device 14 without being operated. That is, when stagnation control is performed before the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is started, the specific image displayed before the first variation game is started (for example, the image OP4 Continues to be displayed without movement and the movement of the particular image is stalled. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is executed before the first game in the specific state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the specific state is started is It continues to be displayed in motion, and the motion of the particular image is stalled.

When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears when the fourth opening effect is executed, the effect display device 14 displays an image C imitating the third character.
H3 is displayed. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGf. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed.

Hereinafter, control relating to various opening effects will be described.
First, control relating to the first opening effect will be described.
When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first opening effect is performed. Specifically, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the warning image TGa is displayed. In this embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S302 of the special stagnation process, the first stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. After the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is performed. When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image OP1 is displayed.

  When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. In the second embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the sub control CPU 41a determines the content of the effect of the appearance effect under the determination probability shown in FIG. 19A. The sub control CPU 41a determines the contents of the appearance effect as in the case where the first opening effect is performed also when the second to fourth opening effects described below are performed. Do. In addition, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control. As in the first embodiment, in the special visual recognition control, the sub control CPU 41a controls the backlight BL such that the backlight BL is turned off. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that an image of one color is displayed in at least the transmissive region 14a of the effect display device 14.

  Further, in the case of executing the first opening effect, that is, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the alerting image TGa. Then, when the variation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGa at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, a period from when measurement of a specific time is started to when the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. And in this embodiment, the execution period in which stagnation control including opening time measured in Step S303 is performed is shorter than specific time, ie, a specific period.

In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the subsidiary control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the first opening effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image OP1 and the image (for example, the image CH3) related to the appearance effect ends, the alert image TGa continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special attention is issued (within a specific period) after the start of the execution of the attention warning regarding the immersion before the first game in the special state is started. When the first game in the state is started, the alert regarding the inset continues to be executed. In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the subsidiary control CPU 41a causes the display of the warning image TGa to end upon the input of the fluctuation game start command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first game in the special state is started after the specific period after the start of the execution of the attention alerting before the first game in the special state is started, The execution of the alert regarding the inset is finished. Incidentally, even if the bet number is set either before or after the specific period has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the first opening effect continues to be executed without ending. The attention warning continues to be implemented.

  In addition, when the settlement command is input while the first opening effect is being executed, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first opening effect is ended. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGa. In addition, even if the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a warns the user when ending the first opening effect. It also ends the display of TGa. As in the first embodiment, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed. Furthermore, when the waiting time elapses without setting the number of bets thereafter, the waiting display effect is executed in the effect display device 14, and a warning regarding the inset is executed during the execution of the waiting effect.

Next, control relating to the second opening effect will be described.
When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second opening effect is performed. Specifically, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the warning image TGc is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S306 of the special stagnation process, the second stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. After the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is performed. When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image OP2 is displayed. When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. In addition, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

  Further, in the case of executing the second opening effect, that is, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the warning image TGc. Then, if the variation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGc at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, a period from when measurement of a specific time is started to when the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. And in this embodiment, the execution period in which stagnation control including opening time measured in Step S307 is performed is shorter than specific time, ie, a specific period.

In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the subsidiary control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the second opening effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image OP2 and the image relating to the appearance effect ends, the alert image TGc continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the special attention is issued (within a specific period) after the start of the execution of the attention warning regarding the immersion before the first game in the special state is started. When the first game in the state is started, the alert regarding the inset continues to be executed. In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the subsidiary control CPU 41a causes the display of the warning image TGc to end upon the input of the fluctuation game start command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first game in the special state is started after the specific period after the start of the execution of the attention alerting before the first game in the special state is started, The execution of the alert regarding the inset is finished. Incidentally, after the measurement of the specific time is started, the second opening effect continues to be executed without ending, regardless of whether the bet number is set before or after the elapse of the specific period. The attention warning continues to be implemented.

  When the settlement command is input during execution of the second opening effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second opening effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGc. Even when the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a warns the user when the second opening effect is ended. The display of TGc is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed. Furthermore, when the waiting time elapses without setting the number of bets thereafter, the waiting display effect is executed in the effect display device 14, and a warning regarding the inset is executed during the execution of the waiting effect.

Next, control relating to the third opening effect will be described.
When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third opening effect is performed. Specifically, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alerting image TGe is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S310 of the special stagnation process, the non-special third stagnation start command is input to the sub-control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is executed.

  When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image OP3 is displayed. Further, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. Do. When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

Further, in the case of executing the third opening effect, that is, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the alerting image TGe. Then, when the variation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGe at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, a period from when measurement of a specific time is started to when the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. And in this embodiment, the execution period in which stagnation control including opening time measured in Step S311 is performed is shorter than specific time, ie, a specific period.

  In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the subsidiary control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the third opening effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image OP3 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, the alert image TGe continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the identification is performed (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the attention alert regarding the immersion before the first game in the specific state is started. When the first game in the state is started, the alert regarding the inset continues to be executed. In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the warning image TGe to end upon the input of the fluctuation game start command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first game in the specific state is started after the specific period after the start of the execution of the attention alerting before the first game in the specific state is started. The execution of the alert regarding the inset is finished.

  In addition, when the settlement command is input during execution of the third opening effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third opening effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGe. Even when the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a warns the user when the third opening effect is ended. The display of TGe is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed. However, the third opening effect is executed when it is controlled to the first advantageous effect state triggered by the winning of the promotion player role again. Therefore, when the third opening effect is executed, since re-game is given, the alert about the adjustment effect and the return of the storage medium is executed on condition that the adjustment button 19 is operated. After being done, the waiting effect is not executed even if the waiting time has elapsed.

Next, control relating to the fourth opening effect will be described.
When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth opening effect is performed. Specifically, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the warning image TGf is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S310 of the special stagnation processing, the special third stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. Then, after the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is executed.

When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image OP4 is displayed. When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. . When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control. In addition, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the first actuator A1 to operate the heart movable body 25.

  Further, in the case of executing the fourth opening effect, that is, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the warning image TGf. Then, when the variation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGf at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, a period from when measurement of a specific time is started to when the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. And in this embodiment, the execution period in which stagnation control including opening time measured in Step S311 is performed is shorter than specific time, ie, a specific period.

  In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the subsidiary control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the fourth opening effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image OP4 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, the alert image TGf continues to be displayed. At this time, the heart movable body 25 moves to the origin 25a and returns to the origin 25a. As described above, in the present embodiment, the identification is performed (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the attention alert regarding the immersion before the first game in the specific state is started. When the first game in the state is started, the alert regarding the inset continues to be executed. In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the subsidiary control CPU 41a causes the display of the warning image TGf to end upon the input of the fluctuation game start command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, when the first game in the specific state is started after the specific period after the start of the execution of the attention alerting before the first game in the specific state is started. The execution of the alert regarding the inset is finished.

  Further, when the settlement command is input during execution of the fourth opening effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth opening effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGf. In addition, even if the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a warns the user when the fourth opening effect is ended. The display of TGf is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed. However, the fourth opening effect is executed when the player is controlled to the second advantageous effect state triggered by the winning of the promotion player role. Therefore, when the fourth opening effect is executed, it is a situation where the re-game is given, so the alert about the adjustment effect and the return of the storage medium is executed on condition that the settlement button 19 is operated. After being done, the waiting effect is not executed even if the waiting time has elapsed.

Here, a warning regarding the indenting performed in the slot machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described.
The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to execute a warning (shown in FIG. 15 (d)) regarding immersion which is executed when the warning image GT3 is displayed. In addition, the slot machine 10 relates to the alerting (shown in FIG. 28A) regarding the indentation performed by displaying the alerting image TGa and the embedding performed by the alerting image TGc displayed. The alerting (shown in FIG. 28B) is configured to be executable. In addition, the slot machine 10 relates to the alerting (shown in FIG. 28C) regarding the indentation performed by the alerting image TGe being displayed, and the embedding performed by the alerting image TGf displayed. A notice (shown in FIG. 28D) is configured to be executable. Then, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the immersion performed by displaying the alert image GT3 corresponds to the alert regarding the integration performed during execution of the standby effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the immersion performed by displaying the alert image TGa is the notification regarding the integration performed before the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state is started. It corresponds to awakening. Further, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the immersion performed by displaying the alert image TGc is the alert regarding the integration performed before the first variation game in the second bonus gaming state is started. It corresponds to awakening. Further, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the immersion performed by displaying the alert image TGe and the alert regarding the integration performed by displaying the alert image TGf are in the advantageous rendering state. This corresponds to a warning about a depression performed before the first variation game is started.

  Attention alert images GT3, TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are all play that pachinko and pachislot are enjoyed moderately. "Let's pay attention to the letters" "(character information) and" ". ] (Character information) and it is an image containing. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect and before the start of the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state, the second bonus gaming state, and the advantageous rendering state is "Pachinko pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. ] Is the content which displays the character. In addition, the contents of the alert regarding the ingraining performed during the execution of the standby effect and before the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state, the second bonus gaming state and the advantageous rendering state is started are: "Let's be careful. ] Is the content which displays the character.

  As described above, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed before the first variation game in the bonus game is started. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed before the first variation game in the bonus game is started is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed during the execution of the standby effect. Note that, in the present embodiment, when a single bonus game is generated among the bonus games, the alert regarding the inlaid is not executed. In the present embodiment, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed before the first variation game in the specific bonus game is started. It can be said that there is.

In addition, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed before the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is started. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed prior to the start of the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed during the execution of the standby effect. In addition, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed before the first fluctuation game in the bonus gaming state starts relates to the immersion performed before the first fluctuation game in the advantageous rendering state is started It is the same as the content of alerting. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed prior to the start of the first fluctuation game in the advantageous rendering state is the integration of the warning performed prior to the start of the first fluctuation game in the bonus gaming state Same as the content of the alert about

  As described above, the slot machine 10 is executed during the execution of the standby effect and before the start of the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state, the second bonus gaming state, and the advantageous rendering state. The content of the alert regarding the entanglement is common and identical. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the mode of alerting regarding the penetration is different.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15 (d) and 28 (a) to 28 (d), the position where the alerting image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14 is the alerting image on the effect display device 14 It differs from the position where TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are displayed. Further, the size of the alerting image GT3 displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the sizes of the alerting images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the alert display image GT3 is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the alert display images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are displayed in the effect display device 14. Further, the font of characters (character information) included in the alert image GT3 is different from the font of characters (character information) included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf. In addition, the color of characters included in the alert image GT3 (so-called, character color) is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alerting image GT3 is different from the size of the characters included in the alerting images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf.

  In the same manner as in the first embodiment, the position to be displayed, the size, the display area to be displayed, the font of characters included in the image, and the image are included in the image to be displayed when the alert regarding the penetration is performed. If at least one of the color of the characters and the size of the characters included in the image is different, it can be said that the manner of alerting regarding embedding differs.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect is the alerting regarding the integration performed before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started. It differs from the aspect of In other words, the mode of alerting regarding immersion performed prior to the start of the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is different from the embodiment of alerting regarding integration performed during execution of the standby effect.

  Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect is the alerting mode regarding the embedding performed before the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is started, and It is different. In other words, the mode of alerting regarding immersion performed prior to the start of the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is different from the aspect of alerting regarding embedding performed during execution of the standby rendering.

As shown in FIGS. 28 (a) to 28 (d), the positions where the alerting images TGa and TGc are displayed on the effect display device 14 are the positions where alerting images TGe and TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. It is different from Further, the sizes of the alerting images TGa and TGc displayed on the effect display device 14 are different from the sizes of the alerting images TGe and TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the alerting images TGa and TGc are displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the alerting images TGe and TGf are displayed in the effect display device 14. Further, the font of characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the font of characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. Further, the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. In addition, the size of characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the size of characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding immersion performed prior to the start of the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is more than the start of the first variation game in the bonus gaming state Also, it differs from the aspect of the alert regarding the depression which is executed before. In other words, the alerting mode regarding immersion performed prior to the start of the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is performed prior to the start of the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state Differs from the alerting aspect of As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed before the first game in the specific state is started is performed before the first game in the special state is started. This is different from the alerting mode regarding the burn-in.

  As shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, the position where the alert display image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position where the alert display image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the size of the alerting image TGa displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the alerting image TGc displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area where the alerting image TGa is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the alerting image TGc is displayed in the effect display device 14. Further, the font of characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the font of characters included in the alert image TGc. Further, the color of the characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the color of the characters included in the alert image TGc. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the size of the characters included in the alert image TGc.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed before the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state is started is the first variation game in the second bonus gaming state. This is different from the aspect of the alert regarding depression that is performed before the start. In other words, the aspect of the alert regarding the immersion performed before the first variation game in the second bonus gaming state is started is prior to the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state being started. It differs from the aspect of alerting regarding depression performed. In the present embodiment, the first bonus stop corresponds to the first special display result, and the first bonus gaming state corresponds to the first special state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second bonus stop corresponds to the second special display result, and the second bonus gaming state corresponds to the second special state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the alerting regarding the immersion performed after the execution of stagnation control is started before the first game in the first special state is started is the first aspect in the second special state. This is different from the mode of alerting regarding immersion performed after the execution of stagnation control is started before the game is started.

  As shown in FIGS. 28C and 28D, the position at which the alert display image TGe is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the position at which the alert display image TGf is displayed in the effect display device 14. Further, the size of the alerting image TGe displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the alerting image TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area where the alerting image TGe is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the alerting image TGf is displayed in the effect display device 14. In addition, the font of the characters included in the alert image TGe is different from the font of the characters included in the alert image TGf. Further, the color of the characters included in the alert image TGe is different from the color of the characters included in the alert image TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the warning image TGe is different from the size of the characters included in the warning image TGf.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed prior to the start of the first variation game in the first advantageous rendering state is the first variation game in the second advantageous rendering state. This is different from the aspect of the alert regarding depression that is performed before the start. In other words, the aspect of the alert regarding the immersion performed before the first variation game in the second advantageous rendering state is started is before the first variation game in the first advantageous rendering state is started. It differs from the aspect of alerting regarding depression performed. That is, in the present embodiment, the first advantageous rendering state corresponds to the first effect identifying state, and the second advantageous rendering state corresponds to the second effect identifying state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the alerting regarding the immersion performed after the execution of stagnation control is started before the first game is started in the first effect specifying state is the second effect specifying state in the second effect specifying state This is different from the mode of alerting regarding immersion performed after execution of stagnation control is started before the first game is started.

  Next, based on FIGS. 29A to 29C, when the first bonus combination is won and the first bonus gaming state is generated, the single bonus combination is won and the single bonus gaming state occurs. A case where the game is played and a case where the promotion replay role is won and controlled to the first advantageous effect state will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 29A, when the first bonus combination is won in the variation game, the first bonus gaming state is generated, but the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state is started. The execution of stagnation control is started at a timing t31 earlier than that. In stagnation control started at timing t31, measurement processing of a predetermined opening time is performed, and stagnation control is continued at least in the opening time. In addition, when execution of stagnation control is started at timing t31, the first opening effect is executed. At this time, an alerting image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding immersion is executed. Further, it is assumed that the bet button 18 is operated and the start lever 20 is operated at a timing t32 before the opening time has elapsed since the start of the stagnation control. At timing t32, since the stagnation control is being executed, the bet number can not be set, and the fluctuation game can not be started.

  Also, when the start lever 20 is operated after the bet number is set at the timing t33 before the opening time has passed from the timing t31 and the specific time has elapsed from the timing t31, the first bonus game The first variation game in the state is started, and the execution of the first opening effect ends. At this time, the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the first bonus effect state. However, from the timing t31 to the timing t34 when the specific time elapses, the alert display image 14 continues to display the alerting image TGa, and the alerting regarding the intrusion continues to be executed.

  On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated after the bet number is set at timing t35 after the opening time has elapsed from the timing t31 and the specific time has elapsed from the timing t31, the first bonus The first variation game in the gaming state is started, and the execution of the first opening effect ends. At this time, the effect display device 14 displays the background image in the first bonus effect state. Further, with the completion of the execution of the first opening effect, the display of the alerting image TGa is also terminated, and the alerting regarding the inset is terminated.

  Incidentally, when the waiting time elapses without the bet number being set even after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t31, the execution of the waiting effect is started. Then, during execution of the standby effect, the alerting image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding the inset is executed. In this case, since the first opening effect is continuously performed until the waiting time elapses, the attention display image 14 continues to be displayed on the effect display device 14, and the attention regarding the inset is continuously performed.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (b), if the single bonus combination is won in the variation game executed while being controlled to the normal effect state, the single bonus game state is controlled, but the effect state is the normal effect state Is continuously controlled. Then, the opening effect is not executed before the change game in the single bonus game state is started. In addition, stagnation control is not executed prior to the start of the variation game in the single bonus gaming state. In addition, the warning about the stagnation is not executed before the variation game in the single bonus gaming state is started.

  As shown in FIGS. 29A and 29B, in the slot machine 10, stagnation control is executed before the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state is started, while the single bonus game is performed. No stagnation control is performed prior to the start of the variation game in state. Further, in the slot machine 10, a warning regarding immersion is executed before the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state is started, while before the variation game in the single bonus gaming state is started. No attention alert is given.

  As shown in FIG. 29 (c), when the promoted player is won in the variable game and is controlled to the first advantageous rendering state, rather than the first variation game in the first advantageous rendering state is started. The execution of stagnation control is started at the previous timing t41. It is to be noted that, as the promotion replay is won, replay is provided and the number of bets is set.

  In stagnation control started at timing t41, measurement processing of a predetermined opening time is performed, and stagnation control is continued at least in the opening time. In addition, when execution of stagnation control is started at timing t41, the third opening effect is executed. At this time, an alerting image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding the inset is executed. Further, it is assumed that the start lever 20 is operated at a timing t42 before the opening time has elapsed since the start of the stagnation control. At timing t42, since the stagnation control is being executed, the fluctuation game can not be started.

  In addition, when the start lever 20 is operated at timing t43 before timing T41 and a specific opening time after timing t41, the first variation game in the first advantageous rendering state is performed. It is started and the execution of the third opening effect ends. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the background image in the first advantageous effect state is displayed. However, from the timing t41 to the timing t44 when the specific time elapses, the alert display image 14 continues to display the alerting image TGe, and the alerting regarding the intrusion continues to be executed.

  On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated at timing t45 after the opening time has elapsed from the timing t41 and the specific time has elapsed from the timing t41, the first variation game in the first advantageous rendering state The third opening presentation is finished. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the background image in the first advantageous effect state is displayed. Further, with the completion of the execution of the third opening effect, the display of the alerting image TGe is also terminated, and the alerting regarding the inset is terminated. Incidentally, even if the waiting time has elapsed after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t41, the waiting effect is not executed since the replay is given.

According to the second embodiment, in addition to the effects (5), (14), (15), (23), (25) to (39) and (49) to (53) of the first embodiment, the following Have the same effect.
(56) The stagnation control is executed prior to the start of the first variation game (game) in the bonus gaming state (special state) which is generated after the bonus stop (the special display result) is derived, and the said stagnation An attention alert is performed after execution of the control is initiated. As described above, attention control is performed by executing stop control and temporarily interrupting the play before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started, and then performing a warning regarding the start-up. Can be performed effectively. By the way, when the bonus gaming state is generated, the player's interest is directed to the bonus gaming state and there is a high possibility that the player lacks calmness. In this manner, after the stagnation control is executed to temporarily suspend the play in a situation where the player is likely to lack calmness, the alert regarding the stagnation is implemented by executing the alert regarding the stagnation. It can be implemented more effectively.

  (57) A mode of alerting regarding immersion which is executed after execution of stagnation control is started before the first variation game (game) is started in the first bonus gaming state, and in the second bonus gaming state Different from the alerting mode regarding depression performed after the execution of stagnation control is started before the first variation game is started. This makes it possible to grasp which of the first bonus game state (the first special state) and the second bonus game state (the second special state) is generated from the alerting mode regarding the inset. . As a result, it is possible to increase interest in alerting regarding depression, and to implement alerting regarding depression effectively.

  (58) If stagnation control is performed before the first variation game (game) in the bonus gaming state (special status) is started, display is performed before the first game in the bonus gaming state is started The selected specific image (for example, the image OP1 or the image OP2) continues to be displayed without being operated, and the operation of the specific image is stagnated. For example, if a particular image is activated while a warning about depression is being performed, there is a risk that the player's interest may shift to the particular image, but the particular image may continue to be displayed without operating. By doing this, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in alerting regarding depression.

  (59) The stagnation control is performed prior to the start of the first variation game (game) in the advantageous rendering state (specific state) in which the bell navigation effect as a guidance effect for guiding an operation capable of acquiring a profit is executed. , A warning regarding depression is performed after execution of the stagnation control is started. As described above, the stagnation control is performed to temporarily suspend the play before the first game in the advantageous rendering state is started, and then the alert regarding the stagnation is performed by performing the alert regarding the stagnation. It can be implemented effectively. By the way, when the advantageous rendering state is generated, the player's interest is directed to the advantageous rendering state and there is a high possibility that the player lacks calmness. In this manner, after the stagnation control is executed to temporarily suspend the play in a situation where the player is likely to lack calmness, the alert regarding the stagnation is implemented by executing the alert regarding the stagnation. It can be implemented more effectively.

  (60) A mode of alerting regarding immersion which is performed after execution of stagnation control is started before the first variation game (game) is started in the first advantageous effect state, and in the second advantageous effect state Different from the alerting mode regarding depression performed after the execution of stagnation control is started before the first variation game is started. Thereby, it is possible to grasp which of the first advantageous rendering state (the first effect specifying state) and the second advantageous rendering state (the second effect specifying state) is generated from the alerting mode regarding the inset. It becomes. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in alerting regarding depression, and to implement alerting regarding depression effectively.

(61) When stagnation control is performed before the first variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state) is started, display is performed before the first game in the advantageous effect state is started The selected specific image (for example, the image OP3 or the image OP4) continues to be displayed without being operated, and the operation of the specific image is stagnated. For example, if a particular image is activated while a warning about depression is being performed, there is a risk that the player's interest may shift to the particular image, but the particular image may continue to be displayed without operating. By doing this, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in alerting regarding depression.

  (62) If the first variation game in the bonus gaming state (special state) is started within the specified period, the alert regarding the inset will continue to be executed without ending. For this reason, it is possible to execute the warning on the depression at least within a specific period after the execution of the warning on the depression is started before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started, and the attention on the depression is noted. The awakening can be carried out effectively. In addition, when the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started after the specific period after the execution of the alerting regarding the stagnation is started before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started, the variation game is The attention alert continues to run until it is started. Therefore, even before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started, even if the first variation game is not started within the specific period, the first variation game is started after the specific period. The alert can be performed on the depression, and the alert on the depression can be effectively performed.

  (63) The stagnation control is executed and the play alert is performed after the play is temporarily stagnated, so that it becomes easy to pay attention to the alert regarding the stagnation. Further, the specific period is set longer than the execution period in which stagnation control is performed before the first variation game (game) in the bonus gaming state (special state) is started. By this, for example, even if the player having a low interest in the alert regarding the stagnation executes the first variation game in the bonus gaming state immediately after the termination of the stagnation control, etc., the alert on the stagnation is within the specific period. Will continue to run without exiting. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the end of the alert regarding the inset, and to increase the interest in the alert on the inset. As a result, for the player who is not interested in the alert regarding the intruding, the alert regarding the intruding can be executed effectively.

  (64) When the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state (specific state) is started within the specific period, the attention warning regarding the inset continues to be executed without ending. For this reason, it is possible to execute the warning on the depression at least within a specific period after the execution of the warning on the depression is started prior to the start of the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state, The awakening can be carried out effectively. In addition, when the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is started after the specific period after the execution of the attention alerting starts before the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is started, the variation game is The attention alert continues to run until it is started. Therefore, even if the first variation game is not started within the specific period before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started, the first variation game is started after the specific period. The alert can be performed on the depression, and the alert on the depression can be effectively performed.

(65) The stagnation control is executed and the play alert is performed after the play is temporarily stagnated, so that it is easy to draw attention to the alert regarding the stagnation. In addition, the specific period is set longer than the execution period in which stagnation control is performed prior to the start of the first variation game (game) in the advantageous rendering state (specific state). Thus, for example, even if the player having low interest in the alert regarding the stagnation performs the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state immediately after the termination of the stagnation control, etc., the alert on the stagnation is within the specific period. Will continue to run without exiting. For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the end of the alert regarding the inset, and to increase the interest in the alert on the inset. As a result, for the player who is not interested in the alert regarding the intruding, the alert regarding the intruding can be executed effectively.

  (66) The content of the alert about the obscurity executed during the execution of the standby effect and the alert regarding the obsessiveness performed before the first variation game (game) in the bonus gaming state (special status) is started If the contents are different, there is a possibility that a false recognition may occur, such as alerting different events. However, the content of the alert about the obscurity executed during the execution of the standby effect and the content of the alert about the obscurity executed before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is made the same. In this way, it is possible to execute a common attention warning and suppress false recognition of the warning.

  (67) Contents of the alert about the obscurity executed during execution of the standby effect and the alert about the obscurity executed before the first variation game (game) in the advantageous effect state (specific state) is started If the contents are different, there is a possibility that a false recognition may occur, such as alerting different events. However, the content of the alert about the obscurity performed during the execution of the standby effect and the content of the alert about the entrainment performed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started are made the same. In this way, it is possible to execute a common attention warning and suppress false recognition of the warning.

  (68) The content of the alert regarding the immersion which is executed before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started is more than the first variation game in the standby effect being executed or in the bonus gaming state is started If the content is different from the content of the alert regarding the depression performed previously, there is a possibility that a false recognition may occur, such as each alerting a different event. However, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed prior to the start of the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state, the content of the alert regarding the integration performed during the execution of the standby effect, and the first in the bonus game The content is the same as the content of the attention warning regarding to be executed before the fluctuation game is started. In this way, it is possible to execute a common alert regarding depression, and to suppress false recognition of the alert.

  (69) The manner of the alerting regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the manner of the alerting regarding the immersion performed before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started. By this, according to each situation during execution of the standby effect and before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started, the alert regarding the embedding is effectively executed to suppress the embedding. it can.

  (70) The aspect of the alerting regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect is different from the aspect of the alerting regarding the immersion performed before the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is started. By this, according to each situation during execution of the standby effect and before the first variation game in the advantageous effect state is started, the alert regarding the immersion is effectively executed to suppress the intrusion. it can.

(71) The alerting mode regarding the immersion performed prior to the start of the first fluctuation game in the bonus gaming state is performed before the start of the first fluctuation game in the advantageous rendering state Differs from the alerting aspect of In this way, attention is effectively drawn to the attention according to each situation before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started and before the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is started. Can be performed to suppress the engulfment.

Third Embodiment
Next, a third embodiment of the gaming machine will be described. The same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and the detailed description and the drawings will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment, the stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the alert regarding the stagnation is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, stagnation control is executed in the bonus gaming state (in the middle of the bonus gaming state), and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, alerting regarding stagnation is executed. Further, in the first embodiment, stagnation control is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding depression is executed. On the other hand, in the third embodiment, stagnation control is executed in the advantageous rendering state (in the middle of the advantageous rendering state), and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding stagnation is executed.

  In the third embodiment, stagnation control is executed when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied in the middle of the first bonus gaming state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, a predetermined execution condition is established by executing the tenth variation game in the first bonus gaming state. Therefore, in the third embodiment, after the tenth variation game is executed in the first bonus gaming state, the first bonus gaming state is in the middle, and the tenth variation game is executed in the first bonus gaming state. Later, stagnation control is performed. The main control CPU 40a performs counting processing to count the number of fluctuation games executed after being controlled to the first bonus gaming state or the first bonus rendering state, and from the counting result in the counting processing, the first bonus gaming is performed. It is possible to specify the number of variation games executed in the state or the first bonus effect state.

  In the third embodiment, stagnation control is executed when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied in the middle of the second bonus gaming state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, the fifth variation game is executed in the second bonus gaming state, whereby a predetermined execution condition is established. Therefore, in the third embodiment, after the fifth variation game is executed in the second bonus gaming state, it is in the middle of the second bonus gaming state, and the fifth variation game is executed in the second bonus gaming state. Later, stagnation control is performed. The main control CPU 40a performs counting processing to count the number of fluctuation games executed after being controlled to the second bonus gaming state or the second bonus rendering state, and based on the counting result in the counting processing, the second bonus game The number of variation games executed in the state or the second bonus effect state can be specified.

  In the third embodiment, stagnation control is performed when a predetermined execution condition is satisfied in the middle of the advantageous effect state. Specifically, in the third embodiment, a predetermined execution condition is established by executing the tenth variation game in the advantageous rendering state. Therefore, in the third embodiment, after the tenth variation game is executed in the advantageous rendering state is in the middle of the advantageous rendering state, and stagnation control is executed after the tenth variation game is executed in the advantageous rendering state Ru. Note that the main control CPU 40a performs counting processing to count the number of fluctuation games executed after being controlled to the advantageous rendering state, and the number of fluctuation games executed in the advantageous rendering state from the counting result in the counting processing It has become identifiable.

Here, the special stagnation processing in the third embodiment will be described based on FIG.
In the specific stagnation process of the third embodiment, the main control CPU 40a determines whether it is in the middle of the first bonus effect state (step S401). In step S401, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the tenth variation game is over after entering the first bonus effect state. That is, in step S401, the main control CPU 40a determines whether a predetermined execution condition established in the middle of the first bonus gaming state is established. Determining that the tenth variation game is over after entering the first bonus effect state in step S401 corresponds to determining that it is in the middle of the first bonus gaming state. If the first bonus effect state is in the middle (step S401: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the first stagnation start command (step S402). In the output process of the first stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer. Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs an interval time measurement process (step S403). In step S403, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined interval time, and stands by until the interval time elapses. Then, when the interval time has elapsed and the measurement process of the interval time is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the first stagnation end command (step S404), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the first stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation end command in the output buffer.

  If it is not in the middle of the first bonus effect state (step S401: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether it is in the middle of the second bonus effect state (step S405). At step S405, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the fifth variation game has ended since the second bonus effect state was entered. That is, in step S405, the main control CPU 40a determines whether a predetermined execution condition established in the middle of the second bonus gaming state is satisfied. Determining that the fifth variation game is over after entering the second bonus effect state in step S405 corresponds to determining that the second bonus gaming state is in the middle. If the second bonus effect state is being performed (step S405: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the second stagnation start command (step S406). In the output process of the second stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer. Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs an interval time measurement process (step S407). In step S407, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined interval time, and stands by until the interval time elapses. Then, when the interval time has elapsed and the measurement process of the interval time is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the second stagnation end command (step S408), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the second stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation end command in the output buffer.

  When it is not in the middle of the second bonus effect state (step S405: NO), the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not it is in the advantageous effect state (step S409). In step S409, the main control CPU 40a determines whether or not the tenth variation game has ended since the advantageous effect state was entered. That is, in step S409, the main control CPU 40a determines whether a predetermined execution condition established in the middle of the advantageous rendering state is satisfied. If it is determined in step S409 that the tenth variation game is over after entering into the advantageous rendering state, it corresponds to being determined to be in the middle of the advantageous rendering state. If it is not in the middle of the advantageous rendering state (step S409: NO), the main control CPU 40a ends the special stagnation process. On the other hand, when it is in the middle of the advantageous rendering state (step S409: YES), the main control CPU 40a performs an output process of the third stagnation start command (step S410). In the output process of the third stagnation start command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation start command in the output buffer. The third stagnation start command includes a special third stagnation start command and a non-special third stagnation start command. Then, in the case of the second advantageous effect state among the advantageous effect states, in step S410, the main control CPU 40a stores a special third stagnation start command in the output buffer. On the other hand, in the first advantageous rendering state among the advantageous rendering states, the main control CPU 40a stores a non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S410.

  Subsequently, the main control CPU 40a performs measurement processing of the interval time (step S411). In step S411, the main control CPU 40a measures a predetermined interval time, and stands by until the interval time elapses. Then, when the interval time has elapsed and the measurement process of the interval time is finished, the main control CPU 40a performs the output process of the third stagnation end command (step S412), and ends the special stagnation process. In the output process of the third stagnation end command, the main control CPU 40a stores the third stagnation end command in the output buffer.

  In the present embodiment, the processes of steps S402 to S404, the processes of steps S406 to S408, and the processes of steps S410 to S412 correspond to stagnation control. In the following description, the execution of the stagnation control is performed when the processing of step S402 to step S404 is performed, the processing of step S406 to step S408 is performed, and the processing of step S410 to step S412 are performed. Sometimes. In the present embodiment, the main control CPU 40a performs stagnation control by executing any one of the processing of steps S402 to S404, the processing of steps S406 to S408, and the processing of steps S410 to S412. A function as a control means is realized. Further, in the present embodiment, among the processing of step S402 to step S404, the processing of step S406 to step S408, and the processing of step S410 to step S412, the processing of step S403, step S407 and step S411 has a predetermined interval time. Control to measure, that is, measurement control of a predetermined interval time is performed. Further, in the present embodiment, the processing of step S402 to step S404 and the processing of step S406 to step S408 are performed when in the bonus gaming state corresponding to the special state, so stagnation control is performed when in the special state. It turns out that it is executed. Similarly, in the present embodiment, the processing of step S410 to step S412 is performed when the advantageous rendering state corresponding to the specific state is performed, so it can be understood that stagnation control is executed when the specific state.

  In the slot machine 10 of the third embodiment, when stagnation control is performed, the effect display device 14 executes interval effect. In the slot machine 10, an appearance effect may be performed on the effect display device 14 while the interval effect is being performed.

Next, various interval effects will be described.
The main control CPU 40a performs the processing of steps S402 to S404 of the special stagnation processing, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the interval effect in the first bonus effect state. Ru. Further, after the processing of step S404 to step S406 of the special stagnation processing is performed by the main control CPU 40a and the execution of the stagnation control is started, the effect display device 14 executes the interval effect in the second bonus effect state Ru. In addition, after the processing of steps S410 to S412 of the special stagnation processing is performed by the main control CPU 40a and the execution of the stagnation control is started, in the effect display device 14, the interval effect in the advantageous effect state is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (a), when in the first bonus gaming state (in the middle of the first bonus gaming state), the alert display image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the alert regarding the immersion is executed Ru. In other words, the alert about the obsessiveness that is executed when being in the first bonus game state is "play that pachinko and pachislot are enjoyed moderately. It is the contents to display the letter of]. Also, be aware of the attention to the attention about the attention that is executed when in the first bonus gaming state. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the alert image TGa corresponding to the predetermined alert image is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image TGa is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGa is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alerting image TGa is displayed in the display area other than the reel viewable area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the embedding is executed. In addition, the display area in which the alert image TGa is displayed is an area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGa is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting image regarding the inset is executed in the predetermined effect area by displaying the alerting image TGa in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alerting image TGa is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body It does not overlap with the

  In the following description, the interval effect to be executed when in the first bonus gaming state is referred to as a first interval effect. In the first interval effect, the image IN1 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image IN1 "Let's get a lot of medals! ] Is an image including characters (character information). The image IN1 displayed when the first interval effect is performed continues to be displayed without being operated in the effect display device 14. That is, when stagnation control is executed when in the bonus gaming state, the specific image (for example, image IN1) displayed in the bonus gaming state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the specific image Operation is stagnated. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is performed in the special state, the specific image displayed in the special state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the operation of the specific image is stagnated. Be done.

  When the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears when the first interval effect is performed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 imitating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGa. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (b), when in the second bonus gaming state (in the middle of the second bonus gaming state), the alert display image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the alert regarding the immersion is executed Ru. In other words, the alert about the attention that is executed when being in the second bonus game state is "play that pachinko and pachislot are enjoyed moderately. It is the contents to display the letter of]. Also, be aware of the attention to the attention regarding the attention that will be executed when in the second bonus gaming state. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the alerting image TGc corresponding to the predetermined alerting image is longer than the width of one reel.

Further, the alert image TGc is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14 a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGc is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alerting image TGc is displayed in the display area other than the reel viewable area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the embedding is executed. Further, the display area in which the alert image TGc is displayed is an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alerting image TGc is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting regarding the embedding in the predetermined effect area is executed by displaying the alert image TGc in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alerting image TGc is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body It does not overlap with the

  In the following description, the interval effect to be executed when in the second bonus gaming state is referred to as a second interval effect. In the second interval effect, the image IN2 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image IN2 "is still, from now! ] Is an image including characters (character information). The image IN2 displayed when the second interval effect is executed continues to be displayed without being operated in the effect display device 14. That is, when stagnation control is executed when in the bonus gaming state, the specific image (for example, image IN2) displayed in the bonus gaming state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the specific image Operation is stagnated. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is performed in the special state, the specific image displayed in the special state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the operation of the specific image is stagnated. Be done.

  When an appearance effect is executed with effect contents in which the first character appears when the second interval effect is performed, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH1 imitating the first character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH1 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGc. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (c), when in the first advantageous rendering state (in the middle of the first advantageous rendering state), the alert display image 14 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding immersion is executed. Ru. In other words, the alert about the obsessiveness that is executed when being in the first advantageous production state, "Pachinko Pachislot is a play to enjoy moderately. It is the contents to display the letter of]. Also, be aware of the attention to the attention about the attention that will be executed when in the first effect state. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in the front view, the width of the alert image TGe corresponding to the predetermined alert image is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image TGe is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14 a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGe is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alerting image TGe is displayed in the display area other than the reel viewable area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the embedding is executed. Further, the display area in which the alert image TGe is displayed is an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alerting image TGe is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting image regarding the embedding is performed in the predetermined effect area by displaying the alerting image TGe in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alert image TGe is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and is an operation area of the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body. It does not overlap with the

In the following description, the interval effect to be executed when in the first advantageous effect state is referred to as a third interval effect. In the third interval effect, the image IN3 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image IN3 says, “This is a game! ] Is an image including characters (character information). Note that the image IN3 displayed when the third interval effect is performed continues to be displayed in the effect display device 14 without being operated. That is, when stagnation control is executed when the advantageous rendering state is in progress, the specific image (for example, the image IN3) displayed in the advantageous rendering state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the particular image is Operation is stagnated. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is executed before the first game in the specific state is started, the specific image displayed before the first game in the specific state is started is It continues to be displayed in motion, and the motion of the particular image is stalled.

  When the third interval effect is executed, and the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the second character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH2 imitating the second character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH2 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGe. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (d), when in the first advantageous rendering state (in the middle of the first advantageous rendering state), the alert display image TGf is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding immersion is performed Ru. In other words, the alert about the obsessiveness that is executed when being in the second advantageous production state, "Pachinko / Pachislot is a play that enjoys moderately. It is the contents to display the letter of]. In addition, the alert about the obscuration that is executed when it is in the 2nd advantageous production state, 'Let's be discouraged. ] Has become the content to display the characters. In the slot machine 10, in front view, the width of the alert image TGf corresponding to the predetermined alert image is longer than the width of one reel.

  Further, the alert image TGf is displayed in the display area of the effect display device 14 which does not include the transmissive area 14 a. That is, in the effect display device 14 of the transmissive display, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed is different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visible area in which the reels 13a to 13c arranged on the rear side can be visually recognized. It is a display area. As described above, in the slot machine 10, the alert image TGf is displayed in the display area other than the reel view area in the display area of the transmissive display, and the alert regarding the inset is executed. Further, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed is an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. In the present embodiment, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed corresponds to a predetermined effect area. Then, in the present embodiment, the alerting image relating to immersion is performed in the predetermined effect area by displaying the alerting image TGf in the predetermined effect area. As described above, the display area in which the alert image TGf is displayed is a display area different from the transmissive area 14a as the reel visual recognition area, and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body It does not overlap with the

  In the following description, the interval effect to be executed when in the second advantageous effect state is referred to as a fourth interval effect. In the fourth interval effect, the heart movable body 25 operates. Since the alerting image TGf is displayed in a region not overlapping the operation region of the heart movable body 25, the heart movable body 25 and the alerting image TGf are displayed in front view even when the heart movable body 25 operates. Does not suffer.

  In the fourth interval effect, the image IN4 is displayed on the effect display device 14. Image IN4 "When the game! ] Is an image including characters (character information). The image IN4 displayed when the fourth interval effect is executed continues to be displayed without being operated in the effect display device 14. That is, when stagnation control is executed when in the advantageous rendering state, the specific image (for example, the image IN4) displayed in the advantageous rendering state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the specific image Operation is stagnated. That is, in the present embodiment, when stagnation control is performed in the specific state, the specific image displayed in the specific state continues to be displayed without being operated, and the operation of the specific image is stagnated. Be done.

When the fourth interval effect is executed, and the appearance effect is executed with the effect content in which the third character appears, the effect display device 14 displays an image CH3 imitating the third character. At this time, in the effect display device 14, the image CH3 is displayed on the back side of the alerting image TGf. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect corresponding to the specific effect is performed.

Hereinafter, control relating to various interval effects will be described.
First, control relating to the first interval effect will be described.
When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first interval effect is executed. Specifically, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the warning image TGa is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the first stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S402 of the special stagnation processing, the first stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. After the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is performed. When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image IN1 is displayed.

  When the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. In the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the sub control CPU 41a determines the content of the effect of the appearance effect under the determination probability shown in FIG. 19A. The sub control CPU 41a determines the contents of the appearance effect, as in the case where the first interval effect is performed, also when the second to fourth interval effects described below are executed. Do. In addition, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control. As in the first embodiment, in the special visual recognition control, the sub control CPU 41a controls the backlight BL such that the backlight BL is turned off. Further, in the special visual recognition control, the sub-control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that an image of one color is displayed in at least the transmissive region 14a of the effect display device 14.

  In addition, in the case of executing the first interval effect, that is, when the first stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the alerting image TGa. Then, when the variation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGa at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, a period from when measurement of a specific time is started to when the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. And in this embodiment, the execution period in which stagnation control including interval time measured in Step S403 is performed is shorter than specific time, ie, a specific period.

In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the subsidiary control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the first interval effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image IN1 and the image related to the appearance effect (for example, the image CH3) is ended, the alert image TGa continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the alert regarding the inset in the special state until the specific time elapses. The attention warning continues to be implemented. In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the subsidiary control CPU 41a causes the display of the warning image TGa to end upon the input of the fluctuation game start command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started after the specific period after the execution of the alert regarding the inset in the special state is started, the execution of the alert on the inset is ended. Incidentally, even if the bet number is set either before or after the specific period has elapsed since the measurement of the specific time was started, the first interval effect continues to be executed without ending. The attention warning continues to be implemented.

  In addition, when the settlement command is input during execution of the first interval effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the first interval effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGa. In addition, even if the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a warns the user when the first interval effect is ended. It also ends the display of TGa. As in the first embodiment, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed. Furthermore, if the number of bets is not set and the standby time elapses thereafter, the standby display is executed in the effect display device 14 if the replay is not given, and the embedded effect occurs during the execution of the standby effect Alerting is performed.

Next, control relating to the second interval effect will be described.
When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second interval effect is executed. Specifically, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the warning image TGc is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the second stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S406 of the special stagnation processing, the second stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. After the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is performed. When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image IN2 is displayed. When the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. In addition, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

  In the case of executing the second interval effect, that is, when the second stagnation start command is input, the sub-control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the alerting image TGc. Then, if the variation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGc at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, a period from when measurement of a specific time is started to when the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. And in this embodiment, the execution period in which stagnation control including interval time measured in Step S407 is performed is shorter than specific time, ie, a specific period.

In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the second interval effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image IN 2 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, the alert image TGc continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started (within a specific period) from the start of the execution of the alert regarding the inset in the special state until the specific time elapses. The attention warning continues to be implemented. In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the subsidiary control CPU 41a causes the display of the warning image TGc to end upon the input of the fluctuation game start command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started after the specific period after the execution of the alert regarding the inset in the special state is started, the execution of the alert on the inset is ended. Incidentally, after the measurement of the specific time is started, the second interval effect continues to be executed without ending, regardless of whether the bet number is set before or after the elapse of the specific period. The attention warning continues to be implemented.

  In addition, when the settlement command is input during execution of the second interval effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the second interval effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGc. In addition, even if the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a warns the user when the second interval effect is ended. The display of TGc is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed. Furthermore, if the number of bets is not set and the standby time elapses thereafter, the standby display is executed in the effect display device 14 if the replay is not given, and the embedded effect occurs during the execution of the standby effect Alerting is performed.

Next, control relating to the third interval effect will be described.
When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third interval effect is executed. Specifically, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the alerting image TGe is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the non-special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S410 of the special stagnation process, the non-special third stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. Therefore, after the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is executed.

  When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image IN3 is displayed. Further, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. Do. When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control.

In addition, in the case of executing the third interval effect, that is, when the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the alerting image TGe. Then, when the variation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub-control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGe at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, a period from when measurement of a specific time is started to when the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. And in this embodiment, the execution period in which stagnation control including interval time measured in Step S411 is performed is shorter than specific time, ie, a specific period.

  In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the third interval effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image IN 3 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, the alert image TGe continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started (within the specified period) from the start of the execution of the alert regarding the inset in the specific state until the specific time elapses. The attention warning continues to be implemented. In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the sub control CPU 41a causes the display of the warning image TGe to end upon the input of the fluctuation game start command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started after the specific period after the execution of the alert regarding the inset in the specific state is started, the execution of the alert on the inset is ended.

  In addition, when the settlement command is input during the execution of the third interval effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the third interval effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGe. In addition, even if the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a warns the user when ending the third interval effect The display of TGe is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed. Furthermore, if the number of bets is not set and the standby time elapses thereafter, the standby display is executed in the effect display device 14 if the replay is not given, and the embedded effect occurs during the execution of the standby effect Alerting is performed.

Next, control relating to the fourth interval effect will be described.
When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth interval effect is executed. Specifically, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the warning image TGf is displayed. In the present embodiment, after the main control CPU 40a stores the special third stagnation start command in the output buffer in step S410 of the special stagnation processing, the special third stagnation start command is input to the sub control CPU 41a. Then, after the execution of stagnation control is started, a warning about depression is executed.

  When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the image IN4 is displayed. When the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a determines the effect content of the appearance effect, and controls the effect display device 14 so that the appearance effect of the determined effect content is executed. . When the non-special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a executes special visual recognition control. In addition, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the first actuator A1 to operate the heart movable body 25.

  In addition, in the case of executing the fourth interval effect, that is, when the special third stagnation start command is input, the sub control CPU 41a starts measurement of a specific time after displaying the alerting image TGf. Then, when the variation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a displays the alerting image TGf at least until the specific time has elapsed. To control the effect display device 14. In the present embodiment, a period from when measurement of a specific time is started to when the specific time elapses corresponds to the specific period. And in this embodiment, the execution period in which stagnation control including opening time measured in Step S411 is performed is shorter than specific time, ie, a specific period.

  In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the subsidiary control CPU 41a causes the effect display device 14 to end the fourth interval effect. Control. As a result, in the effect display device 14, although the display of the image IN 4 and the image related to the appearance effect ends, the alert image TGf continues to be displayed. At this time, the heart movable body 25 moves to the origin 25a and returns to the origin 25a. As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started (within the specified period) from the start of the execution of the alert regarding the inset in the specific state until the specific time elapses. The attention warning continues to be implemented. In addition, when the fluctuation game start command is input after the specific time has elapsed, the subsidiary control CPU 41a causes the display of the warning image TGf to end upon the input of the fluctuation game start command. Control 14 As described above, in the present embodiment, when the next game is started after the specific period after the execution of the alert regarding the inset in the specific state is started, the execution of the alert on the inset is ended.

  When the settlement command is input during execution of the fourth interval effect, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so that the fourth interval effect ends. At this time, the sub control CPU 41a controls the effect display device 14 so as to end the display of the alerting image TGf. In addition, even if the settlement command is input before the specific time has elapsed since the start of the measurement of the specific time, the sub control CPU 41a warns the user when ending the fourth interval effect The display of TGf is also ended. As described above, when the settlement command is input, the sub control CPU 41a controls the execution of the settlement effect and the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. For this reason, when the settlement button 19 is operated while the alerting for the inset is being executed, in the effect display device 14, the execution of the alerting for the inset is ended, and the alerting for the return of the storage medium is executed. It will be. That is, in the present embodiment, when the settlement operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being executed, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alert regarding the inset is ended and the alert regarding the return of the storage medium To be executed. Furthermore, if the number of bets is not set and the standby time elapses thereafter, the standby display is executed in the effect display device 14 if the replay is not given, and the embedded effect occurs during the execution of the standby effect Alerting is performed.

Here, a warning regarding the indenting performed in the slot machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described.
The slot machine 10 is configured to be able to execute a warning (shown in FIG. 15 (d)) regarding immersion which is executed when the warning image GT3 is displayed. In addition, the slot machine 10 relates to the alerting (shown in FIG. 31 (a)) related to the indentation performed by displaying the alerting image TGa and the embedding performed by the alerting image TGc displayed. The alerting (shown in FIG. 31B) is configured to be executable. Further, the slot machine 10 relates to the alerting (shown in FIG. 31 (c)) regarding the indentation performed by displaying the alerting image TGe and the embedding performed by the alerting image TGf displayed. A notice (shown in FIG. 31D) is configured to be executable. Then, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the immersion performed by displaying the alert image GT3 corresponds to the alert regarding the integration performed during execution of the standby effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the immersion performed by displaying the alert image TGa corresponds to the alert regarding the integration performed in the first bonus gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the immersion performed by displaying the alert image TGc corresponds to the alert regarding the integration performed in the second bonus gaming state. Further, in the present embodiment, the alert regarding the immersion performed by displaying the alert image TGe and the alert related to the integration performed by displaying the alert image TGf are in an advantageous rendering state. It corresponds to the alerting about the depression performed at a certain time.

  Attention alert images GT3, TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are all play that pachinko and pachislot are enjoyed moderately. "Let's pay attention to the letters" "(character information) and" ". ] (Character information) and it is an image containing. In other words, the contents of the alert regarding the entanglement to be executed in the execution of the standby effect, in the first bonus game state, in the second bonus game state, and in the advantageous effect state are “ Pachinko and pachislot is a modestly enjoyable game. ] Is the content which displays the character. In addition, the contents of the alert regarding the entanglement to be executed in the execution of standby effect, in the first bonus game state, in the second bonus game state, and in the advantageous effect state are “ Let's be careful about the entanglement. ] Is the content which displays the character.

  As described above, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed during the bonus game. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during the bonus game is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed during the execution of the standby effect. Note that, in the present embodiment, when a single bonus game is generated among the bonus games, the alert regarding the inlaid is not executed. In the present embodiment, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect can be said to be the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed during the specific bonus game.

  Further, the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect is the same as the content of the alert regarding the inset that is performed in the advantageous effect state. In other words, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed when being in the advantageous rendering state is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed during the execution of the standby rendering. Further, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed in the bonus game state is the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed in the advantageous rendering state. In other words, the content of the attention alert regarding the depression performed in the advantageous rendering state is the same as the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed in the bonus game state.

  As described above, in the slot machine 10, the stagnation is performed during execution of standby effect, in the first bonus gaming state, in the second bonus gaming state, and in the advantageous effect state. The contents of the alert regarding are common and identical. On the other hand, in the slot machine 10 of the present embodiment, the mode of alerting regarding the penetration is different.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 15 (d) and 31 (a) to 31 (d), the position where the alerting image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14 is the alerting image on the effect display device 14 It differs from the position where TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are displayed. Further, the size of the alerting image GT3 displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the sizes of the alerting images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the alert display image GT3 is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the alert display images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf are displayed in the effect display device 14. Further, the font of characters (character information) included in the alert image GT3 is different from the font of characters (character information) included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf. In addition, the color of characters included in the alert image GT3 (so-called, character color) is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alerting image GT3 is different from the size of the characters included in the alerting images TGa, TGc, TGe, and TGf.

  In the same manner as in the first embodiment, the position to be displayed, the size, the display area to be displayed, the font of characters included in the image, and the image are included in the image to be displayed when the alert regarding the penetration is performed. If at least one of the color of the characters and the size of the characters included in the image is different, it can be said that the manner of alerting regarding embedding differs.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of alerting regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of alerting regarding the embedding performed during the bonus gaming state. In other words, the aspect of the alert regarding the inset that is executed when in the bonus gaming state is different from the aspect of the alert regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect. Further, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the alerting regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect is different from the aspect of the alerting regarding the embedding performed during the advantageous rendering state. In other words, the aspect of the alert regarding the inset that is performed when being in the advantageous rendering state is different from the aspect of the alert regarding the inset that is performed during the execution of the standby presentation.

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) to 31 (d), the positions where the alerting images TGa and TGc are displayed on the effect display device 14 are the positions where alerting images TGe and TGf are displayed on the effect display device 14. It is different from Further, the sizes of the alerting images TGa and TGc displayed on the effect display device 14 are different from the sizes of the alerting images TGe and TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area in which the alerting images TGa and TGc are displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area in which the alerting images TGe and TGf are displayed in the effect display device 14. Further, the font of characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the font of characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. Further, the color of the characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the color of the characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf. In addition, the size of characters included in the alert images TGa and TGc is different from the size of characters included in the alert images TGe and TGf.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode of alerting regarding the immersion performed in the advantageous rendering state differs from the mode of alerting regarding the embedding performed in the bonus gaming state. In other words, the aspect of the alert regarding the inset that is executed when in the bonus game state is different from the aspect of the alert regarding the inset that is performed when in the advantageous rendering state. As described above, in the present embodiment, the aspect of the alert regarding the indentation performed in the specific state is different from the aspect of the alert regarding the indentation performed in the special state.

As shown in FIGS. 31 (a) and 31 (b), the position at which the alert display image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the position at which the alert display image TGc is displayed on the effect display device 14. Further, the size of the alerting image TGa displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the alerting image TGc displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area where the alerting image TGa is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the alerting image TGc is displayed in the effect display device 14. In addition, the font of the characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the font of the characters included in the alert image TGc. Further, the color of the characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the color of the characters included in the alert image TGc. In addition, the size of the characters included in the alert image TGa is different from the size of the characters included in the alert image TGc.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed in the first bonus gaming state is different from the alerting mode regarding the embedding performed in the second bonus gaming state. . In other words, the aspect of the alert regarding the inset that is executed when in the second bonus gaming state is different from the aspect of the alert regarding the inset that is executed when in the first bonus gaming state. In the present embodiment, the first bonus stop corresponds to the first special display result, and the first bonus gaming state corresponds to the first special state. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the second bonus stop corresponds to the second special display result, and the second bonus gaming state corresponds to the second special state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the first special state, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed after the execution of the stagnation control is started is the execution of the stagnation control when the second special state. This is different from the alerting mode regarding depression performed after

  As shown in FIGS. 31 (c) and 31 (d), the position where the alerting image TGe is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the position where the alerting image TGf is displayed in the effect display device 14. Further, the size of the alerting image TGe displayed on the effect display device 14 is different from the size of the alerting image TGf displayed on the effect display device 14. That is, the display area where the alerting image TGe is displayed in the effect display device 14 is different from the display area where the alerting image TGf is displayed in the effect display device 14. In addition, the font of the characters included in the alert image TGe is different from the font of the characters included in the alert image TGf. Further, the color of the characters included in the alert image TGe is different from the color of the characters included in the alert image TGf. In addition, the size of the characters included in the warning image TGe is different from the size of the characters included in the warning image TGf.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed in the first advantageous rendering state is different from the alerting mode regarding the embedding performed in the second advantageous rendering state. . In other words, the aspect of the alert regarding the inset that is performed when in the second advantageous effect state is different from the aspect of the alert regarding the inset that is performed when in the first advantageous effect state. That is, in the present embodiment, the first advantageous rendering state corresponds to the first effect identifying state, and the second advantageous rendering state corresponds to the second effect identifying state. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the stagnation control is started in the first effect specifying state, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed is the second effect specifying state. It differs from the aspect of the alerting regarding the depression performed after being started.

Next, based on FIGS. 32 (a) and 32 (b), the first bonus game state and the first advantageous effect state will be described.
As shown in FIG. 32A, when the tenth variation game in the first bonus gaming state ends, execution of stagnation control is started at timing t51. In stagnation control started at timing t51, measurement processing of a predetermined interval time is performed, and stagnation control is continued at least in the interval time. Further, when execution of stagnation control is started at timing t51, a first interval effect is executed. At this time, an alerting image TGa is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding immersion is executed. Further, it is assumed that the bet button 18 is operated and the start lever 20 is operated at a timing t52 before the interval time has elapsed since the start of the stagnation control. At the timing t52, since the stagnation control is being executed, if it is not possible to set the bet number if the payout combination is won in the tenth variation game in the first bonus gaming state, the variation game is selected. It can not even be started.

  In addition, when the start lever 20 is operated in a state where the bet number is set at the timing t53 before the specific time from the timing t51 after the interval time has elapsed from the timing t51, the first operation is performed. The eleventh variation game in the bonus gaming state is started, and the execution of the first interval effect ends. However, from the timing t51 to the timing t54 when the specific time elapses, the alert display image 14 continues to display the alerting image TGa, and the alerting regarding the intrusion continues to be executed. On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated with the number of bets set at timing t55 after the interval time has elapsed from the timing t51 and after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t51, The eleventh variation game in the 1 bonus gaming state is started, and the execution of the first interval effect ends. At this time, along with the end of the execution of the first interval effect, the display of the alerting image TGa is also terminated, and the alerting regarding the inset is terminated.

  Incidentally, when the waiting time elapses without the bet number being set even after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t51, the execution of the waiting effect is started. Then, during execution of the standby effect, the alerting image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding the inset is executed. In this case, since the first interval effect continues to be executed until the standby time elapses, the alert display image 14 continues to display the alert image TGa, and the alert regarding the indent continues to be executed.

  As shown in FIG. 32B, when the tenth variation game in the first advantageous effect state is ended, execution of stagnation control is started at timing t61. In the stagnation control started at timing t61, measurement processing of a predetermined interval time is performed, and stagnation control is continued at least in the interval time. In addition, when execution of stagnation control is started at timing t61, a third interval effect is performed. At this time, an alerting image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding the inset is executed. In addition, it is assumed that the bet button 18 is operated and the start lever 20 is operated at a timing t62 before the interval time has elapsed since the start of the stagnation control. At the timing t62, since the stagnation control is being executed, if it is not possible to set the bet number if the payout combination is won in the tenth variation game in the first advantageous effect state, the variation game is selected. It can not even be started.

  In addition, when the start lever 20 is operated in a state where the bet number is set at the timing t63 which is after the interval time has elapsed from the timing t61 and before the specific time has elapsed from the timing t61, The eleventh variation game in the advantageous effect state is started, and the execution of the third interval effect ends. However, from the timing t61 to the timing t64 when the specific time elapses, the alert display image 14 continues to display the alerting image TGe, and the alerting regarding the intrusion continues to be executed. On the other hand, when the start lever 20 is operated with the number of bets set at timing t65 after the interval time has elapsed from the timing t61 and after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t61, The eleventh variation game in the 1 advantageous effect state is started, and the execution of the third interval effect ends. At this time, with the end of the execution of the third interval effect, the display of the alerting image TGe is also terminated, and the alerting regarding the inset is terminated.

Incidentally, when the waiting time elapses without the bet number being set even after the specific time has elapsed from the timing t61, the execution of the waiting effect is started. Then, during execution of the standby effect, the alerting image GT3 is displayed on the effect display device 14, and alerting regarding the inset is executed. In this case, since the third interval effect continues to be executed until the standby time elapses, the alert display image 14 continues to display the alerting image TGe, and the alerting regarding the immersion continues to be executed.

According to the third embodiment, in addition to the effects (5), (14), (15), (23), (25) to (39) and (49) to (53) of the first embodiment, the following can be obtained: Have the same effect.
(72) The stagnation control is executed when the bonus game state (special state) is in effect, and the alert about the stagnation is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started. As described above, by performing stagnation control and temporarily interrupting the play while in the bonus gaming state, the alert regarding the immersion can be effectively executed by executing the alert regarding the immersion . In particular, when in the bonus gaming state, the player's interest is directed to the bonus gaming state and is likely to be devoid of coolness. By performing stagnation control and temporarily interrupting play in a situation where there is a high possibility of lack of calmness in this way, the alert regarding the stagnation is executed more effectively by executing the alert regarding the stagnation. It can be done.

  (73) In the second bonus gaming state (second special state), and in the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed after the execution of stagnation control is started when in the first bonus gaming state (first special state) Different from the alerting mode regarding depression performed after the execution of stagnation control was started at a certain time. This makes it possible to grasp which one of the first bonus gaming state and the second bonus gaming state is activated, from the aspect of alerting regarding immersion. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in alerting regarding depression, and to implement alerting regarding depression effectively.

  (74) When stagnation control is executed when in the bonus game state (special state), a specific image (for example, image IN1 or image IN2) displayed in the bonus game state is displayed without operation. And the motion of the particular image is stalled. For example, if a particular image is activated while a warning about depression is being performed, there is a risk that the player's interest may shift to the particular image, but the particular image may continue to be displayed without operating. By doing this, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in alerting regarding depression.

  (75) Stuck control is executed when the bell navi effect as a guidance effect for guiding an operation capable of acquiring a profit is executed (specified state), and stagnation control is executed, and stagnation occurs after execution of the said stagnation control is started Alerting is performed. In this manner, after the stagnation control is performed to temporarily suspend the play in the advantageous rendering state, the alert regarding the obscuration can be effectively executed by executing the alert regarding the obscuration. . In particular, when in the advantageous rendering state, the player's interest is directed to the advantageous rendering state and there is a high possibility that the player lacks calmness. By performing stagnation control and temporarily interrupting play in a situation where there is a high possibility of lack of calmness in this way, the alert regarding the stagnation is executed more effectively by executing the alert regarding the stagnation. It can be done.

  (76) A state of alerting regarding immersion embedded after execution of stagnation control is started when in the first advantageous rendering state (the first staging specific state), and a second advantageous rendering state (the second staging specific state Different from the alerting mode regarding depression performed after the execution of stagnation control is started. As a result, it becomes possible to grasp which of the first advantageous rendering state and the second advantageous rendering state is generated from the aspect of alerting regarding immersion. As a result, it is possible to increase interest in alerting regarding depression, and to implement alerting regarding depression effectively.

  (77) When stagnation control is executed when the advantageous rendering state (specific state) is performed, the specific image (for example, the image IN3 or the image IN4) displayed in the advantageous rendering state is displayed without being operated And the motion of the particular image is stalled. For example, if a particular image is activated while a warning about depression is being performed, there is a risk that the player's interest may shift to the particular image, but the particular image may continue to be displayed without operating. By doing this, it is possible to suppress a decline in interest in alerting regarding depression.

  (78) When the next variation game is started within a specific period, the attention warning regarding the inset continues to be executed without ending. For this reason, it is possible to execute the warning on the depression at least within a specified period after the execution of the warning on the depression is started, and the warning on the depression can be effectively performed. Also, if the next variation game is started after a specific period of time after the execution of the alerting regarding the swallowing is started, the alerting regarding the stagnation continues to be executed until the variation game is started. For this reason, even if the next variation game is not started within the specific period, the alert regarding the indentation can be executed until the next variation game is started after the specific period, and the alert regarding the indentation is effective. Can be implemented.

  (79) The stagnation control is executed and the play alert is performed after the play is temporarily stagnated, so that it is easy to pay attention to the alert regarding the stagnation. In addition, the specific period is made longer than the execution period in which stagnation control is executed when in the bonus game state (special state). Thus, for example, even if the player having a low interest in the alert regarding the stagnation performs the next variation game immediately after the termination of the stagnation control or the like, the alert on the immersion does not end within the specific period. Continue to run on For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the end of the alert regarding the inset, and to increase the interest in the alert on the inset. As a result, for the player who is not interested in the alert regarding the intruding, the alert regarding the intruding can be executed effectively.

  (80) The stagnation control is executed and the play alerting is executed after the play is temporarily stagnated, so that it becomes easy to pay attention to the alert concerning the stagnation. In addition, the specific period is made longer than the execution period in which stagnation control is performed when in the advantageous rendering state (specific state). Thus, for example, even if the player having a low interest in the alert regarding the stagnation performs the next variation game immediately after the termination of the stagnation control or the like, the alert on the immersion does not end within the specific period. Continue to run on For this reason, it is possible to give a sense of discomfort to the end of the alert regarding the inset, and to increase the interest in the alert on the inset. As a result, for the player who is not interested in the alert regarding the intruding, the alert regarding the intruding can be executed effectively.

  (81) In the case where the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect and the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during the bonus gaming state (special status) are different, each alert a different event There is a risk that misidentification such as doing so may occur. However, by making the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect the same as the content of the alert regarding the inset that is executed when in the bonus game state, the same note regarding the inset. Alerting can be performed, and false recognition of the alerting can be suppressed.

(82) When the content of the alerting content regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect and the content of the alerting content regarding the immersion performed during the advantageous rendering state (specific state) are different, each alert different events There is a risk that misidentification such as doing so may occur. However, by making the content of the alert regarding the inset that is performed during the execution of the standby effect the same as the content of the alert regarding the inset that is performed when the advantageous effect is in the state,
It is possible to carry out a common alert regarding depression, and to suppress false recognition of the alert.

  (83) If the content of the alert regarding the inset is different from the content of the alert regarding the inset which is executed while the standby effect is being performed or in the bonus game state, they are different. There is a possibility that a false recognition such as alerting an event may occur. However, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed when being in the advantageous rendering state, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect, and the alert regarding the integration performed when being a bonus game It was identical to the content. In this way, it is possible to execute a common alert regarding depression, and to suppress false recognition of the alert.

  (84) The manner of the alerting regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect is different from the manner of the alerting regarding the immersion performed when in the bonus game state. In this way, it is possible to effectively execute alerting regarding the inset and suppress the inset according to each situation during execution of the standby effect and in the bonus game state.

  (85) The mode of alerting regarding the inset that is executed during execution of the standby effect is different from the mode of alerting regarding the inset that is performed in the advantageous rendering state. In this way, it is possible to effectively execute alerting regarding the inset and suppress the inset according to each situation during execution of the standby effect and in the advantageous effect state.

  (86) The aspect of the alert regarding the inset that is executed when in the bonus game state is different from the aspect of the alert regarding the inset that is performed when in the advantageous rendering state. Thereby, according to each situation in the bonus gaming state and in the advantageous rendering state, alerting regarding the inset can be executed effectively, and the inset can be suppressed.

Fourth Embodiment
Next, a fourth embodiment of the gaming machine will be described. The same components as those in the first embodiment are denoted by the same reference numerals as those in the first embodiment, and the detailed description and the drawings will be omitted.

  In the first embodiment to the third embodiment, the predetermined effect area in which the alert regarding the inset is performed and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 do not overlap. In the fourth embodiment, the predetermined effect area in which the alert regarding the inset is performed and the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as the specific movable body overlap.

  As shown in FIG. 33A, in the fourth embodiment, when the heart movable body 25 does not operate, in a predetermined effect area overlapping the operation area of the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body in front view. An alert may be issued regarding the entanglement. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 33 (b), in the fourth embodiment, when the heart movable body 25 operates, the execution of the alerting regarding the inset is limited. Specifically, in the fourth embodiment, in the case where the execution of the alert regarding the inset is limited, the alert regarding the inset is performed in a rendering area that does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view. That is, in the fourth embodiment, when the heart movable body 25 operates, the execution of the alerting regarding the penetration in the predetermined effect area overlapping the operation area of the heart movable body 25 is stopped in front view, It switches to the execution of the alerting about the penetration in the production | presentation area | region which does not overlap with the operation | movement area | region. Incidentally, in FIG. 33 (b), the predetermined effect area when the alert regarding the indent is performed in FIG. It shows by.

  33 (a) and 33 (b) illustrate the case where the alerting image TGe is displayed on the effect display device 14 and alerting regarding immersion is executed, but another alerting image TGa is illustrated. The same applies to the case where ~ TGd, TGf are displayed and a warning regarding indentation is executed. That is, when the alert about the inset is executed when the other alert images TGa to TGd, TGf are displayed, and the heart movable body 25 does not operate, an effect area overlapping the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view Are configured to carry out a warning regarding depression.

Hereinafter, determination of the presence or absence of the movement of the heart movable body 25 in the case where the alert regarding the inset is performed and the effect area where the alert on the inset is performed will be described.
In the present embodiment, the sub control CPU 41a performs an operation lottery to determine whether the heart movable body 25 is to be operated after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state or the second bonus gaming state. In this embodiment, only when the set value is “3” and the internal mode is the third internal mode, it is possible to determine to operate the heart movable body 25 in the operation lottery. There is. Therefore, the operation lottery may be performed only when the set value is "3" and the internal mode is the third internal mode. Further, in the present embodiment, the sub control CPU 41a performs the operation lottery after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state.

  Then, when it is determined that the heart movable body 25 is not operated in the operation lottery, the sub control CPU 41a determines that the predetermined alerting image (any alerting image among the alerting images TGa to TGf) is in the front view The effect display device 14 is controlled so as to be displayed in the effect area overlapping the operation area of the heart movable body 25.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the heart movable body 25 is operated in the operation lottery, the sub control CPU 41a determines that the predetermined alerting image (any alerting image among the alerting images TGa to TGf) is in the front view The effect display device 14 is controlled so as to be displayed in the effect area which does not overlap with the operation area of the heart movable body 25. When it is determined to move the heart movable body 25 in the operation lottery, the sub control CPU 41a controls the first actuator A1 to operate the heart movable body 25. As described above, in the present embodiment, the predetermined alerting image (an alerting image of alerting images TGa to TGf) is displayed in the effect area that does not overlap the operation area of the heart movable body 25 in front view As described above, the effect display device 14 is controlled to limit the execution of the alert regarding the inset.

  In the slot machine 10 of the fourth embodiment configured as described above, when the heart movable body 25 operates, it can be specified that the set value is “3” and the internal mode is the third internal mode. . That is, if the heart movable body 25 operates, it can be specified that it is an advantageous situation. Therefore, the degree of attention to the movement of the heart movable body 25 can be increased.

  According to the fourth embodiment, the effects (5), (14), (15), (23), (25) to (39), (49) and (51) to (53) of the first embodiment can be obtained. In addition, it has the following effects.

  (87) When the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body does not operate, in front view, a warning about the inset may be executed in a predetermined effect area overlapping the operation area of the heart movable body 25. On the other hand, when the heart movable body 25 operates, the execution of the alerting regarding the inset is limited. As a result, since the execution of the alerting regarding the immersion is limited in accordance with the presence or absence of the movement of the heart movable body 25, the alerting regarding the embedding can be performed more effectively.

  (88) When the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body operates, it is possible to identify an advantageous situation, so that the degree of attention to the operation of the heart movable body 25 can be increased. By raising the degree of attention to the movement of the heart movable body 25, the degree of attention to the movement area of the heart movable body 25 can also be increased. Therefore, in front view, a predetermined effect area overlapping the movement area of the heart movable body 25 If attention is given to the inset, the attention on the inset can be noticed. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively execute the alert regarding the inset.

  In other words, it is possible to execute the alerting on the inset more effectively while avoiding the situation where the movable heart 25 can not show the alert on the inset due to the operation.

The embodiment described above may be modified, for example, to another embodiment as follows.
In the first embodiment, the stagnation control is executed after one change game (final game) of the single bonus gaming state, and the alert regarding the stagnation after the execution of the stagnation control is started. May be configured to be performed. In the second embodiment, the stagnation control is executed before one variation game (first game) in the single bonus gaming state is started, and the stagnation control is started after the execution of the stagnation control is started. The alerting may be configured to be performed. In the third embodiment, the stagnation control is executed when the single bonus gaming state is established, and the alert regarding the stagnation is executed after the execution of the stagnation control is started. May be In addition, the type of bonus game state generated in the above embodiment may be changed, and for example, the single bonus game state may not be generated. That is, the present invention may be applied to a gaming machine in which a single bonus gaming state is not generated.

  -The ending time measured in a predetermined manner in step S203, step S207 and step S211 in the special stagnation processing of the first embodiment may be the same or may be different, for example, it is measured in a part of processing The ending time may be different from the ending time measured in other processes. In addition, the opening time measured in the predetermined in step S303, step S307 and step S311 in the special stagnation processing of the second embodiment may be the same or may be different, for example, measurement in some processing The opening time to be performed may be different from the opening time to be measured in another process. Also, the interval time measured in the predetermined step S403, step S407 and step S411 in the special stagnation process of the third embodiment may be the same or different, for example, it is measured in part of the process The interval time taken may be different from the interval time measured in another process.

  The processing of step S203, step S207, and step S211 in the special stagnation processing of the first embodiment can also be regarded as stagnation control. Similarly, the processes of step S303, step S307, and step S311 in the special stagnation process of the second embodiment can also be regarded as stagnation control. Also, similarly, the processes of step S403, step S407, and step S411 in the special stagnation process of the third embodiment can be regarded as stagnation control. As described above, when the processing after the first to third stagnation start commands are output is regarded as stagnation control, the timing at which the stagnation control is performed, and the timing at which a warning regarding stagnation is performed, May be the same, and it may be configured such that execution of stagnation control is started and a warning regarding depression is performed. In addition, the timing at which the alerting for depression is performed may be earlier than the timing at which the execution of stagnation control is started, and the stagnation control is performed after the attention alert on immersion is performed. It is also good.

  The specific time may be varied according to the type of alerting image. For example, the specific time measured when displaying the alerting image TGa and the specific time measured when displaying the alerting image TGc may be made different. By configuring in this way, it is possible to set a specific time according to the situation, and it is possible to effectively execute attention alerting according to the situation. That is, a specific time in the bonus gaming state (for example, a specific time measured after displaying the alerting image TGa) and a specific time in the advantageous rendering state (for example, a specific measured after displaying the alerting image TGc And time) may or may not be the same. In the case where the specific times are all the same time, the process of selecting the specific time according to the situation can be omitted, so the process performed by the sub control CPU 41a can be simplified. Further, the specific time (the length of the specific period) may be the same as the length of the execution period in which the stagnation control is performed, or may be longer than the execution period in which the stagnation control is performed.

  In the case where the bet number (the bet number) is set within the specific period, the execution of the warning regarding the indent may be configured to end. In this case, it is not necessary to measure a specific time. In addition, when a bet (number of bets) is set within a specific period, the mode of alerting regarding the inset may be made different before and after the number of bets is set. For example, after the number of bets is set, the alerting is performed in a display area different from the area where the navigation effect is performed (for example, the display area where the normal navigation images Na1 to Na3 and the bell navigation images Nb1 to Nb3 are displayed) The image TGa may be displayed. Similarly, when the start lever 20 is operated within a specific period after the replay player has won a prize, the manner of alerting regarding the inset before and after the operation of the start lever 20 may be made different. For example, after the start lever 20 is operated, attention is paid to a display area different from the area where the navigation effect is performed (for example, the display area where the normal navigation images Na1 to Na3 and the bell navigation images Nb1 to Nb3 are displayed) The awakening image TGa may be displayed. When it comprises as mentioned above, when a change game is started and navi production is performed, it can control that execution of the alert about the entanglement gets in the way of navi production. Also, by changing (switching) the alerting mode regarding the inset, the player's line of sight can be easily gathered with respect to the alert regarding the inset, and the alert regarding the inset can be effectively executed.

  -A specific image (for example, the image 60, the image 61, the specific acquisition number image GBc, the image OP1, the image IN1, etc.) may be operated and displayed on the effect display device 14 when stagnation control is being performed. . For example, in the first ending effect, the image 60 may be configured to operate so as to swing and be displayed on the effect display device 14.

  In the case of transition from the first advantageous rendering state to the second advantageous rendering state, a warning regarding immersion may be configured to be executed. Similarly, when transitioning from the second advantageous rendering state to the first advantageous rendering state, a warning regarding the inset may be configured to be executed. Further, when transitioning from the first advantageous rendering state or the second advantageous rendering state to the special advantageous rendering state, a warning regarding the inset may be configured to be executed.

  The type of effect state may be changed, or the transition mode of the effect state may be changed. For example, in the second advantageous rendering state, when the variation game is executed, the advantageous upper limit may be subtracted while the advantageous stay number is not subtracted. As described above, in the second advantageous rendering state, when the variation game is executed, the number of advantageous stays may not be subtracted. Further, when the single bonus gaming state is generated, the game may be shifted to a predetermined effect state. In addition, for example, when the winning of the single bonus combination is permitted, it may be configured to shift to a predetermined effect state in the case where the single bonus combination has not won.

  -The type of gaming state may be changed, or the transition mode of the gaming state may be changed. For example, the gaming state transition may be made different depending on whether the first bonus combination winning is carried over or the second bonus combining is carried on.

  -Although the alert about the stagnation was performed after stagnation control was performed, stagnation control does not need to be performed. For example, even if stagnation control is not performed, a warning regarding depression may continue to be performed at least within a specific period.

  The first end condition and the second end condition may be changed. For example, when the remaining advantageous stay number reaches 0, the end condition that is satisfied when the advantageous upper limit is a value larger than 0 is taken as the first end condition, and the remaining advantageous stay number reaches 0. A termination condition that is satisfied when the advantageous upper limit is 0 may be used as the second termination condition.

  In the embodiment described above, there may be a case where the normal rendering state is shifted to the first advantageous rendering state without passing through the preparation rendering state. For example, in the case where the advantage transfer allowance information is stored in the main control RAM 40c and the promotion replay player has won, a value capable of specifying the first advantage effect state is set in the effect state flag. It may be configured.

  -You may change the content of the alert about the entanglement. For example, the contents of the alert about the entanglement, "Pachinko Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. Let's be careful about contents to display letter (letter information) and "embedded." The content may be one of the content for displaying the character (character information). For example, the alert image TGa, "Pachinko Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. "Let's pay attention to the letters" "(character information) and" ". The character may be an image including one of characters (character information). In addition, the contents of the alert regarding the entanglement are configured so as to include the alert regarding the entanglement to a plurality of game machines among the pachinko game machine, the torso type game machine, the arrange ball game machine, and the ball game machine. It is also good. For example, the alert image TGa, "Pachinko, Pachislot, Arrange Ball, Ball Game is a play that enjoys moderately. ] May be an image including characters (character information).

  -The contents related to the return of the storage medium may be changed. For example, for caution image GTx, please be careful not to forget to take the prepaid card. It does not have to be an image that includes the characters (character information). For example, in the warning image GTx, please be careful not to forget to remove the prepaid card. It may be an image that includes the letters (letter information), and please be aware of the theft of prepaid cards. It may be an image that includes the characters “(character information)”.

  -When the form of alerting is different, the position where the alerting image is displayed on the effect display device 14, the size of the alerting image, the display area where the alerting image is displayed on the effect display device 14, and the alerting image It is not necessary that all the font, character color and size of the included characters (character information) be different. For example, the position where the alerting image is displayed on the effect display device 14, the size of the alerting image, the display area where the alerting image is displayed on the effect display device 14, the font and color of characters included in the alerting image The case where at least one of the sizes is different may be a case where the aspect of alerting is different. Therefore, for example, the aspect of the alerting related to the indentation in which the alerting image TGa is displayed, and the aspect of the alerting related to the indentation in which the alerting image TGb is displayed may be different only in the size of each image.

The manner of the alerting regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect may be the same as the embodiment of the alerting regarding the immersion performed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state. Further, the mode of alerting regarding depression embedded during execution of the standby effect may be identical to the mode of alerting regarding embedding embedded after the final variation game in the advantageous presentation state. In addition, even if the aspect of the alerting about the immersion performed after the last variation game in the bonus gaming state is the same as the aspect of the alert about the immersion executed after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state Good. In other words, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect, the alerting mode related to the immersion performed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state, and after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state It may be the same as the aspect of the alerting regarding the depression performed. In addition, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed after the final variation game in the first bonus gaming state is the same as the alerting mode regarding the indentation performed after the final variation game in the second bonus gaming state It may be In addition, when the first end condition is satisfied and the advantageous rendering state is ended, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed after the last variable game in the advantageous rendering state and the second ending condition are satisfied It may be the same as the form of the alerting regarding the immersion performed after the last variation game in the advantageous rendering state when the state ends. A mode of alerting regarding the immersion performed after the last variation game in the bonus game state when the bonus game state is triggered and the end condition of the advantage period is satisfied, and the advantage period is generated when the bonus game is generated In the case where the end condition of is satisfied, the form of the alerting regarding the immersion performed after the final variation game may be the same.

  The manner of alerting regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect may be identical to the manner of alerting regarding the immersion performed prior to the first variation game in the bonus gaming state. Further, the mode of alerting regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect may be identical to the mode of alerting regarding the embedding performed prior to the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state. In addition, the aspect of alerting regarding immersion being performed prior to the first variation game in the bonus gaming state and the aspect of alerting regarding embedding being performed prior to the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state are the same It may be That is, a mode of alerting regarding obsessing performed during execution of the standby effect, an aspect of alerting regarding obsessing performed prior to the first variation game in the bonus gaming state, and the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state The aspect of the alert regarding the depression performed earlier than may be the same. In addition, a mode of alerting regarding immersion which is executed prior to the first variation game in the first bonus gaming state, and an embodiment of alerting regarding stagnation which is executed prior to the first variation game in the second bonus gaming state And may be identical. In addition, a mode of alerting regarding immersion embedded before the first variation game in the first advantageous rendering state, and an embodiment of alerting regarding embedding embedded before the first variation game in the second advantageous rendering state And may be identical.

The manner of the alerting regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect may be the same as the embodiment of the alerting regarding the immersion performed when in the bonus game state. Further, the alerting mode regarding the inset that is executed during the execution of the standby effect may be the same as the alerting mode regarding the inset that is executed in the advantageous effect state. In addition, the mode of alerting regarding the immersion performed in the bonus game state may be identical to the mode of alerting regarding the integration performed in the advantageous rendering state. In other words, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect, the alerting mode related to the immersion performed when in the bonus game state, and the alert regarding the immersion performed when the advantageous effect state The calling mode may be the same. In addition, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed when in the first bonus gaming state may be the same as the alerting mode regarding the embedding performed when the second bonus gaming state. In addition, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed in the first advantageous rendering state may be the same as the alerting mode regarding the embedding performed in the second advantageous rendering state.

  The alert regarding the entanglement may be performed using the speaker 16. At this time, for example, the speech of the sound output from the speaker 16 may be used as the content of alerting regarding the ingestion, and the main (for example, voice actor) of the audio may be used as the aspect of alerting regarding the ingesting. For example, while performing standby production, "Pachinko Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. Let's be careful about the words "and sorrow". The voice of the male speaking can be output from the speaker 16 so that a warning regarding the inset can be performed. On the other hand, after the final variation game in the state of advantageous production, "Pachinko Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. Let's be careful about the words "and sorrow". The voice of the woman speaking may be output from the speaker 16 so that a warning regarding the inset can be performed. In the case of executing alerting regarding immersion using the speaker 16, alerting regarding integration using the effect display device 14 may also be executed, or integration of the effect display device 14 may be performed. It may be configured not to execute a warning about In addition, when performing the alerting regarding a dent using the speaker 16, the speaker 16 can function as an effect execution means.

  Similarly, a warning regarding return of the storage medium may be performed using the speaker 16. At this time, for example, the speech of the sound output from the speaker 16 may be used as the content of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium, and the voice (for example, voice actor) may be an aspect of the alert regarding the return of the storage medium. In the case where the alert about the return of the storage medium is executed using the speaker 16, the alert about the return of the storage medium using the effect display device 14 may be executed together, or the effect display It may be configured not to execute a warning regarding the return of the storage medium using the device 14.

  -The content of the alert regarding the inset in each situation may be partially or entirely different. For example, the alert image GT3 says, “Pachinko and pachislot is a modestly enjoyable game. "Let's pay attention to the letters" "(character information) and" ". ] And an image including both characters (character information). On the other hand, the alert image TGa says, “Pachinko / Pachislot is a modestly enjoyable play. "Let's pay attention to the letters" "(character information) and" ". It may be an image including one of the characters (character information).

  The first to third embodiments may be combined as appropriate. For example, it is configured such that a warning regarding depression is performed before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started, and a warning regarding depression after the last variation game in the bonus gaming state is performed. May be In addition, the alert about the stagnation is executed before the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is started, and the alert on the immersion after the final fluctuation game in the advantageous rendering state is executed. May be Also, when the bonus gaming state is activated, the alert regarding the immersion is executed before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started, while when the advantageous rendering state is activated, It may be configured such that the alert regarding the indent is performed after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state. When combining the first to third embodiments, the special stagnation processing described in each embodiment may be performed.

-It is not necessary to carry out the alert about the entanglement while the standby effect is being performed. Further, in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to execute a warning regarding the stagnation after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state. Further, in the first embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the alerting regarding the stagnation after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state. Further, in the second embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the warning regarding the depression before the first variation game in the bonus gaming state is started. Further, in the second embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the alert regarding the depression before the first variation game in the advantageous rendering state is started. Further, in the third embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the alerting regarding the inset when in the bonus gaming state. Further, in the third embodiment, it is not necessary to execute the alerting regarding the inset when in the advantageous rendering state. For example, a warning may be made to be performed regarding the entanglement in at least one of after the last variation game in the bonus gaming state and after the last variation game in the advantageous rendering state.

  -Depending on the rendering state or the gaming state before the bonus gaming state is generated, the presence or absence of the alert regarding the immersion may be made different. For example, when the bonus combination is won in the normal effect state and the bonus gaming state is generated, a warning regarding the stagnation is executed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state. On the other hand, even if the bonus combination is won in the advantageous rendering state and the bonus gaming state is generated, a warning regarding the stagnation may be executed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state. Good. Similarly, the presence or absence of the alert regarding the immersion may be made different depending on the rendering state or the gaming state before the advantageous rendering state is generated.

  -Depending on the effect state or the game state after the end of the bonus game state, the presence or absence of the alert regarding the immersion may be made different. For example, when after the end of the bonus game state is in the normal effect state, a warning regarding the burying after the last variation game in the bonus game state is executed. On the other hand, when the bonus game state is over after the termination of the bonus game state, it may be configured to execute attention alerting after the final variation game in the bonus game state.

  The ending effect may be performed while being controlled to the advantageous effect state. In this case, it can be thought as if the advantageous rendering state has ended, and by the fact that the advantageous rendering state is continued after the ending effect is finished, it is possible to improve the interest. In addition, the heart movable body 25 may be configured to operate when the advantageous rendering state is continued. In addition, as described above, when the advantageous rendering state is continuously executed, the warning regarding the depression may not be executed.

  -Even during the variation game, for example, when the upper button SBa or the lower button SBc is operated, the volume of the character voice may be adjustable. At this time, even if, for example, the right button SBb or the left button SBd is operated during the change game, the volume of the background music may not be adjustable. Similarly, even while the variation game is being performed, for example, when the right button SBb or the left button SBd is operated, the volume of the background music may be adjustable. At this time, even if, for example, the upper button SBa or the lower button SBc is operated while the variation game is being executed, the volume of the character voice may not be adjustable.

  The volume may be adjustable by operating the menu button MB within a period after the end of the execution of the alert regarding the indwelling while the standby effect is being performed. Also, the volume may be adjusted by operating any of the upper button SBa, the right button SBb, the lower button SBc, and the left button SBd without operating the menu button MB. At this time, the menu may not be displayed, and the volume may be directly adjusted.

The type of alerting performed during the execution of the waiting effect may be changed. For example, the type of alerting performed during execution of the standby effect may be one type or two types. Further, more types of reminders may be executed than the alerting performed during the execution of the standby effect in the above embodiment. Further, the alerting may not be performed during the execution of the standby effect, and for example, the alerting regarding the inset may not be performed during the execution of the standby effect.

  -During the execution of the standby effect, after the effect relating to the operation of the menu button MB as a predetermined operation means is performed, a warning regarding the inset may be performed. In addition, during the execution of the standby effect, when the alert regarding the inset is being performed, the effect regarding the operation of the menu button MB may be performed. Further, even when the menu button MB is operated during execution of the standby effect, the standby effect may be continued to be executed. In addition, when the alert regarding the inset is being executed during the execution of the standby effect, the alert on the inset may be continued to be executed even when the menu button MB is operated.

  When the bet number (the bet number) is set, the standby effect may be executed. For example, even when the bet number (the bet number) is set, the standby effect is not executed when the replay is awarded, while the standby effect is executed when the replay is not awarded. It may be configured. In addition, when the waiting time has elapsed, the waiting effect may be executed even when the re-game is given. That is, although the standby effect is not executed when the settlement button 19 is operated, the standby effect may be executed when the standby time elapses.

  -Even if the settlement button 19 is operated while the attention warning is being executed, the attention warning regarding depression may be continued to be performed. For example, when the settlement button 19 is operated within the waiting period, the warning regarding the indentation may be continued to be executed. In addition, for example, when a warning regarding depression is performed during execution of the standby effect, the execution of the warning regarding insertion is ended when the settlement button 19 is operated. On the other hand, it may be configured to continue the execution of the attention regarding the embedding when the settlement button 19 is operated, when the attention regarding the immersion is executed after the final variation game in the bonus gaming state. In this case, it may be configured to continue the execution of the attention regarding the inset as the settlement button 19 is operated when the attention regarding the inset is executed after the final variation game in the advantageous rendering state.

  When the settlement process (settlement control) is performed triggered by the operation of the settlement button 19 as the settlement operation means, the standby effect is started to be executed, and the standby effect is performed. You may comprise so that a payment | settlement presentation may be performed. In this case, when the standby effect is being executed, a warning regarding return of the storage medium may be executed. In this case, it is preferable that the time required for the logo effect is longer than the time required from the start of the execution of the settlement effect to the end of the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium. According to this configuration, it is possible to execute the warning regarding the adjustment effect and the return of the storage medium before the various warnings are performed.

The period in which the settlement effect is performed and the period in which the warning about the return of the storage medium is performed may partially or entirely overlap. That is, when the settlement button 19 is operated, the settlement effect may be executed, and a warning regarding the return of the storage medium may be executed. In this case, after the execution of the settlement effect is started, a warning regarding the return of the storage medium may be executed when the settlement effect is performed. In addition, the timing when the execution of the settlement effect is started may be the same as the timing when the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium is started. It should be noted that the settlement effect may be configured to be executed after the execution of the warning regarding the return of the storage medium is started. Alternatively, only one of the settlement effect and the warning about the return of the storage medium may be performed by the effect display device 14. For example, in the effect display device 14, a warning regarding return of the storage medium may be executed, and the settlement effect may be executed in the speaker 16.

  The advantageous rendering state does not have to be applied to the slot machine that can be generated, and may be applied to, for example, a gaming machine capable of causing only the bonus gaming state among the advantageous rendering state and the bonus gaming state. Similarly, the bonus game state may not be applied to the slot machine capable of being generated, for example, it may be applied to a gaming machine capable of generating only the advantageous effect state among the advantageous effect state and the bonus game state.

  -Even in the effect state other than the advantageous effect state, the navigation effect may be performed. For example, when in the preparation effect state, the bell navigation effect may be performed. Further, when in the bonus effect state, that is, even in the bonus game state, the bell navigation effect may be executed.

  In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, as in the first embodiment, the starry sky effect may be performed when the alert regarding the depression is being performed. In the second embodiment and the third embodiment, the starry sky effect is executed before the next internal mode is determined, but the internal mode to be shifted after the bonus gaming state or the advantageous effect state is estimated is estimated. In doing so, the internal mode before the transition may be helpful. Therefore, even when starry sky effect is performed in the second embodiment or the third embodiment, the starry sky effect is an effect that suggests or notifies an advantage related to the occurrence of an advantageous state by suggesting or notifying an internal control state. It can be said.

  -It is not necessary to execute both the appearance presentation and the starry sky presentation. For example, at least one of the appearance presentation and the starry sky presentation may be performed. In addition, after the alert regarding the entanglement is performed, the appearance effect and the starry sky effect may be performed. When configured in this way, it is easy to draw attention to the effect display device 14 in which the alert regarding the inset is executed until the appearance effect or the starry sky effect is executed, and the alert on the inset is effectively executed. Can. In addition, it may be configured so as not to perform the appearance effect and the starry sky effect when the alert regarding the obscurity is being performed. That is, it is not necessary to execute a specific effect that suggests or notifies the degree of advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state.

  The appearance effect as the specific effect may be an effect that suggests the set value that has been set. For example, even if the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the third character appears in the above embodiment, the expectation for the setting value to be “3” is only high, and the setting value is “3”. It may not be possible to specify that In addition, the appearance effect may be an effect of informing a set value that has been set. For example, in the above embodiment, when the appearance effect is executed with the effect contents in which the first character appears, it may be configured to be able to specify that the set value is “1”. That is, the appearance effect may be an effect that suggests a setting value, or an effect that notifies the setting value.

  -The value that can be set as the set value does not have to be three levels of "1" to "3". For example, the set value may be settable from six stages of "1" to "6" . In addition, the setting value may not be applied to the slot machine configured to be changeable.

The starry sky effect as a specific effect may be an effect that suggests an internal mode. For example, even if the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which the planet and the star are displayed in the above embodiment, the degree of expectation for the third internal mode is only high, and the third internal mode You do not need to be able to identify. In addition, the starry sky effect may be an effect of informing the internal mode.
For example, when the starry sky effect is executed with the effect contents in which three stars are displayed in the above embodiment, it may be configured to be able to specify that it is the first internal mode. That is, the starry sky effect may be an effect that suggests the internal mode, or may be an effect that notifies the internal mode.

  -The type of internal mode may be changed. For example, the number of types of internal modes may be two, or four or more. Further, the internal mode as the internal control state may not be configured to be controllable.

  -A part or all of the display area (predetermined display area) in which the alerting image (for example, alerting image TGa) displayed when the alert regarding the intruding is executed is as a reel visible region It may be configured to overlap (overlap) with the transmissive region 14a. That is, the alerting image may be displayed in the transmissive region 14a, and the alert regarding the indent may be performed. In addition, the width of the alerting image displayed when the alert regarding the indentation is executed may be the same as the width of one reel in front view, or may be shorter than the width of one reel. Good.

  -The display area (predetermined display area) in which the alerting image (for example, alerting image TGa) displayed when the alerting about the intruding is performed is the heart movable body 25 as a specific movable body. It may be an area overlapping with the operation area. For example, when the heart movable body 25 does not operate, a warning image TGa may be displayed in an area overlapping with the movement area of the heart movable body 25 so that a warning regarding the indent is performed. On the other hand, when the heart movable body 25 operates, a warning image TGa may be displayed in an area overlapping with the movement area of the heart movable body 25 so that a warning regarding the inset can be performed. In addition, when the heart movable body 25 operates, a warning regarding the inset may not be executed. Also, the specific movable body may be the star movable body 26. The star movable body 26 may be configured to be operable to the front side of the effect display device 14 or may not be configured to operate to the front side of the effect display device 14 as in the above embodiment.

  In the fourth embodiment, the conditions under which the heart movable body 25 operates may be changed. For example, the heart movable body 25 may be configured to operate if the setting value is a setting value having a higher degree of advantage than “1”. In addition, for example, the heart movable body 25 may be configured to be operable in an internal mode that is more advantageous than the first internal mode. In this manner, the movement of the heart movable body 25 may not be determined based on both the set value and the internal mode. In the second embodiment, the fourth embodiment may be adopted. Similarly, in the third embodiment, the fourth embodiment may be adopted.

  -You may change the stop position of the symbol which constitutes an effective line. Also, the number of valid lines may be more than one. For example, the effective line may be configured by the upper stage stop position of the left reel 13a, the middle stage stop position of the middle reel 13b, and the lower stage stop position of the right reel 13c. The stop position of the symbols constituting the effective line may not be constituted by the stop positions of the symbols located on a straight line. For example, the effective line may be configured by the upper stage stop position of the left reel 13a, the middle stage stop position of the middle reel 13b, and the upper stage stop position of the right reel 13c.

  In the above embodiment, the main control CPU 40a may be configured not to store the win information command in the output buffer when the lottery result of the part lottery is out. In this case, when the win information command is not input, the sub control CPU 41a can identify that the lottery result of the part lottery is out.

In the above embodiment, even if the value of the role lottery random number is not distributed to the winning number that allows winning of the symbol combination for which the award is determined, it is not limited to removal but, for example, a predetermined effect (for example, It can also be configured such that a symbol combination (so-called, chance eye) to which a benefit such as an extra effect etc. can be executed can be derived.

  The carryover gaming state may be a gaming state in which the winning of the re-playing combination is easily permitted as compared to the first gaming state. In addition, the carryover gaming state may be a gaming state in which it is difficult for the player to win a prize in comparison with the second gaming state.

  The ending condition of either or both of the first bonus gaming state and the second bonus gaming state may be changed. As in the case of the single bonus gaming state, one or both of the first bonus gaming state and the second bonus gaming state end condition when the number of fluctuation games executed in the bonus gaming state reaches a predetermined number. , May be established. Further, the termination condition of the single bonus gaming state is configured to be satisfied when the number of medals awarded in the bonus gaming state exceeds a predetermined number, as in the first bonus gaming state and the second bonus gaming state. May be

  -In the combination lottery table, even if the predetermined number can be assigned from among the values in the range that can be taken as the value of the combination random number for the winning number that can be determined according to the number of bets (number of bets) Good. For example, when the number of bets is small, it may be difficult to win the winning number as compared to the case where the number of bets is large. That is, when the number of bets is small, the result of the lottery for the winning combination may be more easily released than when the number of bets is large. In addition, only when the upper limit of the bet number is set as the bet number, the player may be configured to be able to win a winning number that allows a bonus combination to be won.

  The above embodiment may be applied to a gaming machine that can be penalized to cause a player to be disadvantaged. Note that the penalty may be applied to one fluctuation game or to plural fluctuation games.

  -It may apply to a pachinko game machine. As described above, pachinko gaming machines are gaming machines in which gaming balls are used as gaming media. For example, when a warning image TGa is displayed on a display device included in a pachinko gaming machine to execute alerting about immersion, the pachinko gaming machine corresponds to a gaming machine in which the first gaming medium is used as a gaming medium, and a slot machine Is equivalent to a gaming machine in which the second gaming medium is used as a gaming medium. In the pachinko gaming machine, a winning lottery such as a big hit is performed on the condition that the gaming ball is fired by operating the firing handle and the gaming ball enters the starting opening. The starting opening includes a first starting opening, which is also referred to as a hammer, and a second starting opening, which is also referred to as a power chute. There are also pachinko machines provided with both of them. And, in the pachinko gaming machine, when the jackpot is won in the jackpot, a jackpot state occurs. In a pachinko gaming machine, when a jackpot is won in a lottery, a jackpot state is generated after a jackpot display result is derived in a symbol variation game.

When the jackpot state is generated, after the opening effect is performed, the round game in which the big winning opening (so-called, attacker) is opened is performed a plurality of times, and the ending effect is performed after the final round game. Specifically, measurement processing of a predetermined opening time is performed, and when the opening time is measured, an opening effect is performed. By performing the measurement of the opening time, the start of the first round game in the jackpot state is stagnated. While the opening effect is being performed, that is, while the opening time is being measured, a specific image among the images displayed on the display device may be displayed without being operated. In addition, after the opening time measurement process is performed, a round game is performed a plurality of times. A round game is a game also referred to as an open game, and entry of a game ball into a large winning opening is permitted, and a winning ball is paid out when the game ball enters the large winning opening. In the round game, the special winning opening is opened in a predetermined opening manner. When the special winning opening is opened in the predetermined opening mode, the number of times the special winning opening is opened may be one or more than one. As described above, in the big hit state, the number of games in which the big winning opening is opened in the predetermined opening mode is the number of times (a plurality of times) more than one. When a plurality of round games are performed while the jackpot state is occurring, measurement processing of a predetermined interval time is performed between each round game. By performing the measurement process of the interval time, for example, the start of the next round game is stagnated. Further, after the final round game in the jackpot state, the measurement processing of the ending time is performed, and when the ending time is measured, the ending effect is executed. By measuring the ending time, the end of the jackpot state is stagnated. While the ending effect is being performed, that is, while the ending time is being measured, a specific image among the images displayed on the display device may be displayed without being operated. In this case, when the measurement processing of the ending time is performed, the specific image continues to be displayed without being moved, and the movement of the specific image is stagnated. And, in the pachinko gaming machine, even after the final round game in the big hit state, while the ending effect is being executed, for example, the attention awakening image TGa is displayed, so that even if it is configured to execute the attention calling regarding the embarrassing Good. That is, after the execution of the measurement processing of the ending time is started after the final round game in the jackpot state, a warning regarding the inset may be executed. As described above, when the pachinko gaming machine executes alerting regarding the inset, the alert regarding the inset may be performed after execution of the opening time measurement process is started. Further, as described above, when the pachinko gaming machine executes the alerting regarding the immersion, the alerting regarding the embedding may be performed after the execution of the measurement processing of the interval time is started. As described above, the measurement processing of the opening time, the measurement processing of the interval time, and the measurement processing of the ending time can be considered as freeze control.

  The pachinko gaming machine can change the area where the game ball is made to flow down according to the amount of operation of the launch handle, and in the pachinko gaming machine, it is possible to strike the gaming ball with a left strike and a right strike. There is also a pachinko gaming machine configured to. In a pachinko gaming machine configured to be able to strike the game ball separately by left and right strikes, for example, a big winning opening may be arranged in the area where the game ball flows down when hit to the right. In such pachinko gaming machines, when the jackpot state is occurring, it is not possible to enter the gaming ball into the big winning opening even if you hit the left, and by hitting the right, the big winning opening of the gaming ball It is possible to gain profits by entering the ball. For this reason, there is also a pachinko gaming machine in which a right-handed guidance effect is executed which guides that it is possible to obtain a profit by right-handling when a jackpot state is generated. In the case of right-handed guidance production, it can be said that this production is also a production for guiding an operation capable of acquiring a profit. Thus, among pachinko gaming machines, there is a pachinko gaming machine capable of causing a jackpot state in which right-handed guidance effect is executed.

In pachinko gaming machines, there is also a pachinko gaming machine in which a small hitting state is generated when a small hitting is won in a winning lottery, and such a pachinko gaming machine may be configured to execute alerting regarding immersion. . The small hit state may be classified as a hit state as well as the big hit state, and the large winning opening is opened even in the small hit state. In the small hit state, the number of times the big winning opening is opened in the predetermined opening mode is often one. Here, "the number of times the special winning opening is opened in the predetermined opening mode is one" does not mean that the number of times the special winning opening is opened is one, and the predetermined opening is When the special winning opening is opened in a mode, the number of times the special winning opening is opened may be a plurality of times. In addition, the predetermined opening mode in the small hit state and the predetermined opening mode in the large hit state may or may not be the same. As described above, in the small hit state, the number of games in which the big winning opening is opened in the predetermined opening mode is one. In addition, the big winning opening that is opened when the small hit state is generated and the big winning opening that is opened when the large hit state is generated may be the same or may not be the same. . Further, among the plurality of types of hit states including the big hit state and the small hit state, the number of games in which the big winning opening is opened in the predetermined open mode in the small hit state may be the smallest. Also, the number of game media that can be acquired when the small hit state is generated may be smaller than the number of game media that can be acquired when the big hit state is generated. For example, among the plurality of types of hit states including the big hit state and the small hit state, the number of game media that can be acquired when the small hit state is generated may be the smallest. Then, when the big hit state is triggered, the alert regarding the embedding may be performed, but when the small hit status is generated, the alert regarding the dent may not be executed. That is, the warning regarding the indent may not be executed when the small hit state is triggered, and the alert regarding the dent may be performed when the big hit state is triggered. By the way, regardless of the big hit state and the small hit state, even if the big winning opening is opened in the predetermined opening mode, the specified number of opening before the big winning opening is opened in the predetermined opening mode When the game ball enters the special winning opening, the opening of the special winning opening in the predetermined opening mode may be finished.

  In pachinko gaming machines, there are pachinko gaming machines that execute waiting effects, and in such pachinko gaming machines, for example, a warning image GT3 is displayed to execute alerting regarding stagnation while executing waiting effects. You may For example, the standby effect in the present embodiment may be adopted as a standby effect in a pachinko gaming machine, and attention may be drawn to the stagnation during execution of the standby effect. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine, the content of the alert regarding the immersion performed during execution of the standby effect may be the same as the content of the alert regarding the integration performed after the final round game in the big hit state. Further, in the pachinko gaming machine, the alerting mode regarding the immersion performed during the execution of the standby effect may be different from the alerting mode regarding the embedding performed after the final round game in the jackpot state. In addition, in a pachinko gaming machine having a movable body, when executing alerting regarding immersion in the pachinko gaming machine, an area where an image (for example, alerting image YGa) displayed when executing alerting regarding immersion is displayed And the specific movable body movement area may not overlap.

  The function of the main substrate 40 in the above embodiment may be realized by being divided into a plurality of substrates. Further, the main control CPU 40a may be configured of a plurality of CPUs mounted on a single substrate.

  In the above embodiment, even if a payout substrate for controlling the payout of medals as game media is provided based on a control signal from the main substrate 40 and the control relating to the payout of medals in the above embodiment is performed by the payout substrate. Good. When configured in this manner, the main substrate 40 and the delivery substrate may be used as the main control unit.

  The function of the sub substrate 41 in the above embodiment may be realized by being divided into a plurality of substrates. For example, a display board specialized for controlling the effect display device 14, a lamp board specialized for controlling the decoration lamp 15, and a sound board specialized for controlling the speaker 16 may be provided, and these board groups are comprehensively controlled. A control substrate may be further provided. Further, the sub control CPU 41a may be configured of a plurality of CPUs mounted on a single substrate.

Next, technical ideas that can be grasped from the above embodiment and another example will be additionally described below.
○ In a gaming machine in which a special state is generated after the special display result is derived, the game control device includes stagnation control means for executing stagnation control and effect control means for controlling effect execution means, and in the effect execution means Alerting is performed, and the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the special state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the alert regarding the stagnation is executed A game machine that features it.

○ A gaming machine capable of generating a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding an operation capable of acquiring a profit can be generated, comprising stagnation control means for executing stagnation control, and effect control means for controlling effect execution means; In the effect execution means, a warning regarding stagnation is to be executed, and the stagnation control is executed after the final game in the specific state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, a caution regarding the stagnation A game machine characterized in that awakening is performed.

  ○ A gaming machine that can play a game on the condition that the number of bets is set, and in which the special state is generated after the special display result is derived, includes effect control means for controlling the effect execution means, In the effect execution means, when the alert regarding the entanglement is executed, and when the alert relating to the entanglement is started after the final game in the special state, the event after the final game in the special state is embedded. If the bet number is set after a specific period since the start of the execution of the alert on alerting, the alerting on the embedded is finished while the alerting on the embedded is started after the final game in the special state If the bet number is set within the above-mentioned specific period after being Game machine and said.

  ○ In a gaming machine capable of playing a game under the condition that the number of bets is set, and capable of generating a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding an operation capable of acquiring a profit is executed, the effect executing means is controlled The presentation control means is provided, and the presentation execution means is configured to execute alerting regarding the inset, and when the execution of alerting regarding the inset is started after the final game in the specific state, the specific state If the bet number is set after a specific period of time after the start of the execution of the alerting for the inundation after the final game in, while the execution of the alert on the ingest is finished, the intruding after the last game in the specific state Cautions regarding inset if bets are set within the specified period after the execution of the alert on Gaming machine, characterized in that outs continue to run.

  In a game machine in which the first special state is generated after the first special display result is derived, and the second special state is generated after the second special display result is derived, effect control means for controlling the effect executing means And the effect executing means is configured to execute a warning regarding the inset, and the number of game media that can be acquired when the first special state is generated is the occurrence of the second special state. Is greater than the number of game media that can be obtained if the second special condition is triggered, the alert regarding the ingest is not executed, and the first special condition is triggered if the second special condition is triggered. A gaming machine characterized in that alerting is performed.

  ○ A gaming machine capable of causing a specific state is provided with effect control means for controlling the effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means is configured to execute alerting regarding the entanglement; When there is 1 specific state and 2nd specific state, when it moves from the 1st specified state to the 2nd specified state, the alert regarding the depression before the first game in the 2nd specified state which it changes A gaming machine characterized in that when transitioning from the first specific state to the normal state without being executed, a warning regarding immersion is performed prior to the first game in the normal state to be transitioned.

  ○ The gaming machine capable of generating an advantageous state is provided with a production control means for controlling the production execution means, wherein the production execution means is configured to execute a warning regarding the entanglement, which is carried out by the production execution means The effect to be performed includes a specific effect that indicates or notifies an advantage regarding the occurrence of the advantageous state, and the specific effect is configured to be executable when a warning regarding immersion is being performed. Gaming machine.

○ In a gaming machine capable of playing a standby effect and capable of playing a game on the condition that a bet number is set, and capable of storing the number of gaming media as a credit, the settlement operation means, the settlement operation It comprises settlement control means for performing settlement control on the condition that the means is operated, and effect control means for controlling the effect execution means, wherein the effect execution means is adapted to execute attention alerting regarding penetration When the settlement operation means is operated when the credit is one or more and the number of bets is one or more, the effect execution means starts the execution of the standby effect and the standby effect is A gaming machine characterized in that a warning regarding depression is performed during execution.

  ○ A standby effect can be executed, and a replay is awarded on condition that the replay player has won, and the number of game media determined to be paid out is awarded on the condition that the payoff has won. The gaming machine comprises a settlement operating means, a settlement control means for performing settlement control under the condition that the settlement operation means is operated, and a presentation control means for controlling the presentation execution means, wherein the presentation execution means During the execution of the standby effect, a warning regarding intrusiveness is performed, and when the settlement operation means is operated after the replay player has won in the game, the settlement control is performed. The execution of the standby effect is not started, and when the settlement operation means is operated after the payout is won in the game, the settlement control is performed and the execution of the standby effect is started. The gaming machine, wherein the alert relates sinking during execution of the stand-effect is performed.

  ○ A gaming machine capable of using a gaming medium based on a value stored in a storage medium for playing a game, the settlement operation means, and the settlement control means performing the settlement control on the condition that the settlement operation means is operated; A presentation control means for controlling the presentation execution means, wherein the presentation execution means is adapted to execute a warning regarding penetration and the settlement operation means is performed when a notification regarding penetration is being performed In the case of being operated, in the effect execution means, the execution of the alerting regarding the penetration is finished, and the alerting regarding the return of the storage medium is executed.

  ○ In a gaming machine capable of executing standby effects, it has effect control means for controlling effect execution means, and predetermined operation means, and in the effect execution means, alerting regarding immersion is performed When the predetermined operation means is operated while the alert regarding the inset is being performed during the execution of the standby effect, the execution of the alert on the inset is ended, and the in-process of the standby effect is performed In the effect executing means, after the alert about the entanglement is executed, the effect regarding the operation of the predetermined operation means is executed.

  ○ In a gaming machine that is capable of executing standby effects and in which a special state is generated after a special display result is derived, the game control device is provided with effect control means for controlling the effect executing means; The alert on the inset is executed during the execution, and the alert on the inset is executed after the final game in the special state, and the content of the alert on the inset executed during the execution of the standby effect Is the same as the content of the alert about the depression performed after the final game in the special state.

  ○ A gaming machine capable of executing a standby effect and capable of generating a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding an operation capable of earning a profit is executed, provided with effect control means for controlling the effect executing means, the effect execution In the means, the alert about the inset is performed during the execution of the standby effect, and the alert on the inset is performed after the final game in the specific state, and is executed during the execution of the standby effect. A gaming machine characterized in that the content of the alert regarding the depression is identical to the content of the alert regarding the depression performed after the final game in the specific state.

○ A plurality of reels and a transmissive display, wherein the transmissive display is arranged on the front side of the plurality of reels, and in the display area of the transmissive display, the reels on the rear side are visible A game including a visible area and displaying a predetermined alerting image in a display area other than the reel visible area in the display area of the transmissive display, and an alert regarding the inset is executed. Machine.

  ○ A specific movable body, an operation control means for controlling the movement of the specific movable body, and an effect control means for controlling an effect execution means, the effect execution means including an effect area including a predetermined effect area And the effect control means can perform control to execute alerting regarding immersion in the predetermined effect area, and in the front view, the predetermined effect area is an operation of the specific movable body A game machine characterized in that the area does not overlap with the area.

  ○ A specific movable body, an operation control means for controlling the movement of the specific movable body, and an effect control means for controlling an effect execution means, the effect execution means including an effect area including a predetermined effect area , And the effect control means can perform control to execute alerting regarding immersion in the predetermined effect area, and when the specific movable body does not operate, the specific movable in the front view In the predetermined effect area overlapping with the movement area of the body, the alerting for the inset may be performed, and when the specific movable body operates, the execution of the alert for the inset is limited. Gaming machine.

  ○ In a gaming machine in which a special state is generated after the special display result is derived, the game control device includes stagnation control means for executing stagnation control and effect control means for controlling effect execution means, and in the effect execution means Alerting is performed, and the stagnation control is executed prior to the start of the first game in the special state, and after the execution of the stagnation control is started, the alert regarding the stagnation A game machine characterized by being executed.

  ○ A gaming machine capable of generating a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding an operation capable of acquiring a profit can be generated, comprising stagnation control means for executing stagnation control, and effect control means for controlling effect execution means; In the effect execution means, a warning regarding stagnation is performed, and the stagnation control is performed before the first game in the specific state is started, and the execution of the stagnation control is started. After that, a gaming machine characterized in that a warning regarding depression is executed.

  ○ In a gaming machine in which a special state is generated after the special display result is derived, the game control device includes stagnation control means for executing stagnation control and effect control means for controlling effect execution means, and in the effect execution means Alerting is performed, and the stagnation control is executed in the special state, and the alerting regarding stagnation is executed after execution of the stagnation control is started. Gaming machine.

  ○ A gaming machine capable of generating a specific state in which a guidance effect for guiding an operation capable of acquiring a profit can be generated, comprising stagnation control means for executing stagnation control, and effect control means for controlling effect execution means; In the effect executing means, a warning regarding stagnation is performed, and the stagnation control is executed when the specific state is established, and after execution of the stagnation control is started, a warning regarding stagnation is generated. A gaming machine characterized by being executed.

  ○ Special visual recognition control means for performing special visual recognition control to make it difficult to visually recognize the reel when the predetermined visual awakening image is displayed and special attention control means for making it difficult to visually recognize the reel is provided, and the special visual recognition control means In control, an image of one color is displayed in the reel visual recognition area.

○ The first gaming medium is a gaming machine that is used as gaming media, and the content of the alert regarding the immersion is to alert the user about the immersion in the game in the gaming machine in which the first gaming media is used as the gaming medium In addition, the second game medium includes a warning about the game integration in the gaming machine used as a game medium.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Slot machine, 13a-13c ... Reel, 14 ... Effect display apparatus, 14a ... Transmission area, 15 ... Decoration lamp, 16 ... Speaker, 17 ... Medal insertion slot, 18 ... Bet button, 19 ... Settlement button, 20 ... Start Lever, 21a to 21c: stop button, 25: heart movable body, 26: star movable body, 30: information panel, 40: main board, 40a: main control CPU, 40b: main control ROM, 40c: for main control RAM, 41 ... secondary board, 41a ... secondary control CPU, 41b ... secondary control ROM, 41c ... secondary control RAM, 45 ... setting value switch, BL ... backlight, EB ... presentation button, HU ... hopper unit.

Claims (4)

With multiple reels,
And a transmissive display,
The transmissive display is disposed in front of a plurality of reels,
The display area of the transmissive display includes a reel visual recognition area in which a reel disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized;
A gaming machine characterized in that a predetermined alerting image is displayed in a display area other than the reel visual recognition area in the display area of the transmissive display, and an alert regarding intruding is executed.   The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the width of the predetermined alerting image is longer than the width of one reel in front view. With a specific movable body,
Operation control means for controlling the operation of the specific movable body;
The display area where the predetermined alerting image is displayed is a display area different from the reel visual recognition area, and is an area which does not overlap with the operation area of the specific movable body. The gaming machine according to 2. Special visual recognition control means is provided which executes special visual recognition control to make it difficult to visually recognize the reel when the predetermined caution awakening image is displayed and a caution regarding an immersion is executed.
The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein the special visual recognition control means turns off the backlight installed behind the reel in the special visual recognition control.